R&S FSW Series User Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. R&S Manuals
  4. Measuring Instruments
  5. FSW Series
  6. User manual

R&S FSW Series User Manual

Signal and spectrum analyzer
Hide thumbs Also See for FSW Series:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual See also: User Manual
®
R&S
FSW
Signal and Spectrum Analyzer
User Manual
(;×ì;2)
1173941102

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the FSW Series and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for R&S FSW Series

Summary of Contents for R&S FSW Series

  • Page 1 ® R&S Signal and Spectrum Analyzer User Manual (;×ì;2) 1173941102...
  • Page 2 ® This manual applies to the following R&S FSW models with firmware version 3.20 and higher: ● ® R&S FSW8 (1312.8000K08) ● R&S ® FSW13 (1312.8000K13) ● ® R&S FSW26 (1312.8000K26) ● ® R&S FSW43 (1312.8000K43) ● R&S ® FSW50 (1312.8000K50) ●...
  • Page 3 Safety Instructions Instrucciones de seguridad Sicherheitshinweise Consignes de sécurité Risk of injury and instrument damage The instrument must be used in an appropriate manner to prevent personal injury or instrument damage. ● Do not open the instrument casing. ● Read and observe the "Basic Safety Instructions" delivered as printed brochure with the instrument.
  • Page 4 Gefahr von Verletzungen und Schäden am Gerät Betreiben Sie das Gerät immer ordnungsgemäß, um elektrischen Schlag, Brand, Verletzungen von Personen oder Geräteschäden zu verhindern. ● Öffnen Sie das Gerätegehäuse nicht. ● Lesen und beachten Sie die "Grundlegenden Sicherheitshinweise", die als gedruckte Broschüre dem Gerät beiliegen. ●...
  • Page 5 Customer Support Technical support – where and when you need it For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our Customer Support Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation, programming or applications of Rohde &...

  • Page 6: Table Of Contents

    ® Contents R&S Contents 1 Preface....................15 For Your Safety......................15 Documentation Overview................... 15 1.2.1 Getting Started Manual....................15 1.2.2 User Manuals and Help....................16 1.2.3 Service Manual......................16 1.2.4 Instrument Security Procedures..................16 1.2.5 Basic Safety Instructions....................16 1.2.6 Data Sheets and Brochures..................16 1.2.7 Release Notes and Open Source Acknowledgment (OSA)..........
  • Page 7 ® Contents R&S 4.1.3 Connecting USB Devices....................33 4.1.4 Connecting an External Monitor..................35 4.1.5 Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection...............36 4.1.6 Configuring the Initial Instrument Settings..............41 4.1.7 Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode.............. 42 Instrument Tour......................44 4.2.1 Front Panel View......................44 4.2.2 Rear Panel View......................55 Trying Out the Instrument..................
  • Page 8 ® Contents R&S 5.4.2 Sequencer Settings.....................121 5.4.3 How to Set Up the Sequencer..................122 6 Measurements and Results...............123 Basic Measurements....................124 6.1.1 Basic Measurement Types..................124 6.1.2 How to Perform a Basic Sweep Measurement............125 6.1.3 Measurement Examples - Measuring a Sinusoidal Signal..........126 6.1.4 Measurement Example –...
  • Page 9 ® Contents R&S 6.5.1 About Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurements............210 6.5.2 NPR Results........................210 6.5.3 NPR Configuration...................... 213 6.5.4 How to Perform NPR Measurements................215 6.5.5 Measurement Example....................215 Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement............. 217 6.6.1 About the Measurement....................217 6.6.2 Typical Applications.....................218 6.6.3 SEM Results.......................
  • Page 10 ® Contents R&S 6.9.3 Time Domain Power Basics - Range Definition Using Limit Lines......291 6.9.4 Time Domain Power Configuration................292 6.9.5 How to Measure Powers in the Time Domain............. 293 6.9.6 Measurement Example....................293 6.10 Harmonic Distortion Measurement................. 295 6.10.1 About the Measurement....................295 6.10.2...
  • Page 11 ® Contents R&S Configuration Overview....................337 Data Input and Output....................339 7.2.1 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output............339 7.2.2 Input Source Settings....................347 7.2.3 Power Sensors......................354 7.2.4 Optional External Generator Control................362 7.2.5 Optional External Mixers..................... 389 7.2.6 Output Settings......................416 7.2.7 Trigger Input/Output Settings..................
  • Page 12 ® Contents R&S Zoomed Displays...................... 487 8.2.1 Single Zoom Versus Multiple Zoom................487 8.2.2 Zoom Functions......................489 8.2.3 How to Zoom Into a Diagram..................490 Marker Usage......................492 8.3.1 Basics on Markers.......................493 8.3.2 Marker Settings......................496 8.3.3 Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions............ 501 8.3.4 Marker (Measurement) Functions................
  • Page 13 ® Contents R&S 10.3.2 Configurable Storage and Recall................603 10.3.3 How to Save and Load Instrument Settings..............609 10.4 Import/Export Functions...................611 10.5 Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings....615 10.5.1 Print and Screenshot Settings..................615 10.5.2 How to Store or Print Screenshots of the Display............625 10.5.3 Example for Storing Multiple Measurement Results to a PDF File......
  • Page 14 ® Contents R&S 11.6.5 General Configuration Settings................... 681 11.7 Service Functions..................... 683 11.7.1 R&S Support Information.................... 683 11.7.2 Self-test Settings and Results..................684 11.7.3 Calibration Signal Display................... 685 11.7.4 Service Functions......................687 11.7.5 Hardware Diagnostics....................689 11.8 Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration........... 690 11.8.1 General Parameter Coupling..................
  • Page 15 ® Contents R&S 12.5.2 How to Operate the Instrument Without a Network.............763 12.5.3 How to Log on to the Network..................763 12.5.4 How to Share Directories (only with Microsoft Networks)........... 765 12.5.5 How to Control the R&S FSW via the Web Browser Interface........766 12.5.6 How to Deactivate the Web Browser Interface............767 12.5.7...
  • Page 16 ® Contents R&S 13.6 Configuring the Result Display................945 13.6.1 General Window Commands..................945 13.6.2 Working with Windows in the Display................946 13.6.3 Examples: Configuring the Result Display..............952 13.7 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters..............955 13.7.1 Defining the Frequency and Span................955 13.7.2 Configuring Bandwidth and Sweep Settings............... 961 13.7.3 Configuring the Vertical Axis (Amplitude, Scaling)............
  • Page 17 ® Contents R&S 13.10.10 Remote Commands for Synchronizing Parameters..........1230 13.11 Using the Status Register..................1243 13.11.1 General Status Register Commands................ 1243 13.11.2 Reading Out the CONDition Part................1244 13.11.3 Reading Out the EVENt Part..................1244 13.11.4 Controlling the ENABle Part..................1245 13.11.5 Controlling the Negative Transition Part..............1246 13.11.6 Controlling the Positive Transition Part..............

  • Page 18: Preface

    ® Preface R&S Documentation Overview 1 Preface This chapter provides safety-related information, an overview of the user documenta- tion and the conventions used in the documentation. 1.1 For Your Safety The R&S FSW is designated for use in industrial, administrative, and laboratory envi- ronments.

  • Page 19: User Manuals And Help

    ® Preface R&S Documentation Overview 1.2.2 User Manuals and Help Separate user manuals are provided for the base unit and the firmware applications: ● Base unit manual Contains the description of all instrument modes and functions. It also provides an introduction to remote control, a complete description of the remote control com- mands with programming examples, and information on maintenance, instrument interfaces and error messages.

  • Page 20: Release Notes And Open Source Acknowledgment (Osa)

    ® Preface R&S About this Manual www.rohde-schwarz.com/brochure-datasheet/FSW 1.2.7 Release Notes and Open Source Acknowledgment (OSA) The release notes list new features, improvements and known issues of the current firmware version, and describe the firmware installation. The open source acknowledgment document provides verbatim license texts of the used open source software.

  • Page 21: Conventions Used In The Documentation

    ® Preface R&S Conventions Used in the Documentation Description of general instrument settings and functions that are independent of the current operating mode ● Network and Remote Operation Information on setting up the instrument in a network and operating it remotely. ●...

  • Page 22: Notes On Screenshots

    ® Preface R&S Conventions Used in the Documentation Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an addition- ally connected mouse. The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on-screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating pro- cedures.

  • Page 23: Documentation Overview

    ® Documentation Overview R&S Service Manual 2 Documentation Overview This section provides an overview of the R&S FSW user documentation. Unless speci- fied otherwise, you find the documents on the R&S FSW product page at: www.rohde-schwarz.com/manual/FSW 2.1 Getting Started Manual Introduces the R&S FSW and describes how to set up and start working with the prod- uct.

  • Page 24: Instrument Security Procedures

    ® Documentation Overview R&S Application Notes, Application Cards, White Papers, etc. https://gloris.rohde-schwarz.com 2.4 Instrument Security Procedures Deals with security issues when working with the R&S FSW in secure areas. It is avail- able for download on the Internet. 2.5 Basic Safety Instructions Contains safety instructions, operating conditions and further important information.

  • Page 25: Welcome To The R&S Fsw

    ® Welcome to the R&S FSW R&S 3 Welcome to the R&S FSW The R&S FSW is a new high-performance Rohde & Schwarz signal and spectrum ana- lyzer developed to meet demanding customer requirements. Offering low phase noise, wide analysis bandwidth and straightforward and intuitive operation, the analyzer makes measurements fast and easy.

  • Page 26: Getting Started

    ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use 4 Getting Started Note: the following chapters are identical to those in the printed R&S FSW Getting Started manual. ● Preparing for Use....................23 ● Instrument Tour....................... 44 ● Trying Out the Instrument..................61 ●...
  • Page 27 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Instrument damage caused by electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage the electronic components of the instrument and the device under test (DUT). Electrostatic discharge is most likely to occur when you connect or disconnect a DUT or test fixture to the instrument's test ports. To pre- vent electrostatic discharge, use a wrist strap and cord and connect yourself to the ground, or use a conductive floor mat and heel strap combination.
  • Page 28 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use diately contact the carrier who delivered the instrument. Make sure not to discard the box and packing material. Packing material Retain the original packing material. If the instrument needs to be transported or ship- ped later, you can use the material to protect the control elements and connectors.
  • Page 29 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Risk of injury if feet are folded out The feet can fold in if they are not folded out completely or if the instrument is shifted. Collapsing feet can cause injury or damage the instrument. ●...
  • Page 30 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Rackmounting The R&S FSW can be installed in a rack using a rack adapter kit (order no. see data sheet). The installation instructions are part of the adapter kit. Risk of instrument damage due to insufficient airflow in a rack If the instrument is run with insufficient airflow for a longer period, the instrument over- heats, which can disturb the operation and even cause damage.
  • Page 31 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use 2. Set the AC power switch on the rear panel to position "O", or disconnect the instru- ment from the AC power supply. The R&S FSW changes into off mode. Risk of losing data If you switch off the running instrument using the rear panel switch or by disconnecting the power cord, the instrument loses its current settings.

  • Page 32: Windows Operating System

    ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Performing a selftest You do not have to repeat the selftest every time the instrument is switched on. It is only necessary when instrument malfunction is suspected. 1. Press the [SETUP] key. 2. Press the "Service" softkey. 3.
  • Page 33 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Risk of rendering instrument unusable The instrument is equipped with the Windows operating system. You can install addi- tional software on the instrument, however, additional software can impair instrument function. Thus, run only programs that Rohde & Schwarz has tested for compatibility with the instrument software.
  • Page 34 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use ● "NormalUser": a standard user account with limited access Some administrative tasks require administrator rights (e.g. the configuration of a LAN network). Refer to the description of the basic instrument setup ([SETUP] menu) to find out which functions are affected.
  • Page 35 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Switching users when using the automatic login function Which user account is used is defined during login. If automatic login is active, the login window is not displayed. However, you can also switch the user account to be used when the automatic login function is active.

  • Page 36: Connecting Usb Devices

    ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use This command reactivates automatic login function. It is active the next time the instrument reboots. 4.1.2.4 Accessing the Start Menu The Windows "Start" menu provides access to the Windows functionality and installed programs. To open the "Start"...
  • Page 37 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use If Windows does not find a suitable driver, it prompts you to specify a directory that contains the driver software. If the driver software is on a CD, connect a USB CD-ROM drive to the instrument before proceeding. When a USB device is then disconnected from the R&S FSW, Windows immediately detects the change in hardware configuration and deactivates the corresponding driver.

  • Page 38: Connecting An External Monitor

    ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Select "Start > Settings > Devices > Device Manager > Update Device drivers" to install the driver. 4.1.4 Connecting an External Monitor You can connect an external monitor (or projector) to the "DVI" or "display port" con- nector on the rear panel of the R&S FSW (see also Chapter 4.2.2.3, "DISPLAY PORT DVI",...

  • Page 39: Setting Up A Network (Lan) Connection

    ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use 6. Select the instrument to be used for display: ● "Display 1": internal monitor only ● "Display 2": external monitor only ● "Duplicate": both internal and external monitor 7. Tap "Apply" to try out the settings before they are accepted permanently, then you can easily return to the previous settings, if necessary.
  • Page 40 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use an IP address and can coexist with a computer and with other hosts on the same network. ● A dedicated network connection (Point-to-point connection) between the instru- ment and a single computer made with a (crossover) RJ-45 network cable. The computer must be equipped with a network adapter and is directly connected to the instrument.
  • Page 41 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Risk of network errors Connection errors can affect the entire network. If your network does not support DHCP, or if you choose to disable dynamic TCP/IP configuration, you must assign valid address information before connecting the instrument to the LAN. Contact your net- work administrator to obtain a valid IP address.
  • Page 42 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Using a DNS server to determine the IP address If a DNS server is configured on the R&S FSW, the server can determine the current IP address for the connection using the permanent computer name. 1.
  • Page 43 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use 5. Tap the entry named "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)" to highlight it. 6. Select the "Properties" button. 7. On the "General" tab, select "Use the following DNS server addresses" and enter your own DNS addresses. For more information, refer to the Windows operating system help.

  • Page 44: Configuring The Initial Instrument Settings

    ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use <Type><variant>-<serial_number> The serial number can be found on the rear panel of the instrument. It is the third part of the device ID printed on the bar code sticker: For example, FSW13-123456 To change the computer name 1.

  • Page 45: Protecting Data Using The Secure User Mode

    ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use 2. Press the "Display" softkey. 3. Select the "General" tab in the "Display" dialog box. 4. Press the "Set Date and Time" button to open the standard Windows "Date and Time Properties" dialog box. 5.
  • Page 46 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Storing required data permanently Any data that is to be available for subsequent sessions with the R&S FSW must be stored on the instrument permanently, before activating the secure user mode. This includes predefined instrument settings, transducer factors and self-alignment data. Self-alignment data Note that self-alignment data becomes invalid with time and due to temperature changes.

  • Page 47: Instrument Tour

    ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour The secure user mode setting and automatic login is automatically deactivated when the "Instrument" user logs on. The "SecureUser" is no longer available. For administrators ("Instrument" user), the secure user mode setting is available in the general system configuration settings (see "...
  • Page 48 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour 10 = Keypad 11 = Navigation controls 12 = (Analog) Baseband Input 50Ω connectors for I/Q signal or Rohde & Schwarz active probes (optional) 13 = (Analog) Baseband Input 50Ω connectors for inverse part of differential I/Q signal (optional, not for R&S FSW85) 14 = TRIGGER INPUT/OUTPUT connectors 15 = EXT MIXER connector (optional)
  • Page 49 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Figure 4-2: Touchscreen elements 1 = Toolbar with standard application functions, e.g. print, save/open file etc. 2 = Tabs for individual measurement channels 3 = Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 4 = Input field for measurement setting 5 = Softkeys for function access 6 = Window title bar with diagram-specific (trace) information 7 = Measurement results area...
  • Page 50 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour 4.2.1.2 POWER Key The "POWER" key is located on the lower left corner of the front panel. It starts up and shuts down the instrument. See also Chapter 4.1.1.5, "Switching the Instrument On and Off", on page 27.
  • Page 51 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Risk of hearing damage Before putting on the headphones, make sure that the volume setting is not too high to protect your hearing. 4.2.1.5 The front panel provides three female USB connectors (USB-A) to connect devices like a keyboard or a mouse.
  • Page 52 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Table 4-2: Function keys Function key Assigned functions Basic measurement settings FREQ Sets the center frequency and the start and stop frequencies for the fre- quency range under consideration. This key is also used to set the fre- quency offset and the signal track function.
  • Page 53 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Function key Assigned functions MEAS Provides the measurement functions. Measurement of multicarrier adjacent channel power (Ch Power ACLR) Carrier to noise spacing (C/N C/N Occupied bandwidth (OBW) Spectrum emission mask measurement (Spectrum Emission Mask) Spurious emissions (Spurious Emissions) Measurement of time domain power (Time Domain Power) Signal statistics: amplitude probability distribution (APD) and cumulative...
  • Page 54 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Type of key Description ESC key Closes all kinds of dialog boxes, if the edit mode is not active. Quits the edit mode, if the edit mode is active. In dialog boxes that contain a "Can- cel"...
  • Page 55 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Arrow Up/Arrow Down Keys The <arrow up> or <arrow down> keys do the following: ● For numeric entries: increments (Arrow Up) or decrements (Arrow Down) the instrument parameter at a defined step width ● In a list: scrolls forward and backward through the list entries ●...
  • Page 56 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour The upper BNC connectors BASEBAND INPUT I and BASEBAND INPUT Q are used to input: ● Single-ended signals ● The positive signal input for differential signals ● Input from active Rohde & Schwarz probes (see data sheet) The lower BNC connectors Ī...
  • Page 57 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour tions to the first are re-established. This can cause a short delay in data transfer after switching the input source. Input via the Analog Baseband Interface can be enabled in the I/Q Analyzer, the Ana- log Demodulation application, or in one of the optional applications that process I/Q data (where available).

  • Page 58: Rear Panel View

    ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Risk of instrument damage Do not overload the input. For maximum allowed values, see the data sheet. For AC- coupling, a DC input voltage of 50 V (1.00 mm connector: 25 V) must never be excee- ded.
  • Page 59 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour 8 = IF OUT 2 GHz / 5 GHz connector 9 = IF/VIDEO/DEMOD connector 10 = TRIGGER 3 INPUT/OUTPUT connector 11 = DIGITAL BASEBAND INPUT/OUTPUT connectors (option B17) 12 = SYNC TRIGGER OUTPUT/INPUT 13 = AUX PORT 14 = GPIB interface 15 = Analog baseband interface (option B71) 16 = External generator control (option B10)
  • Page 60 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour 4.2.2.5 The rear panel provides four additional female USB (USB-A) connectors to connect devices like a keyboard, a mouse or a memory stick (see also Chapter 4.2.1.5, "USB", on page 48). Furthermore, a male USB DEVICE connector (USB-B) is provided, for example to con- nect the R&S FSW to a PC for remote control.
  • Page 61 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour The output connector provides I/Q data streams with a sample rate of up to 600 MHz, if the R&S FSW-B517 option is installed and active. Output is activated in the software ([INPUT/OUTPUT] key). Currently, it is only suppor- ted by the I/Q Analyzer application.
  • Page 62 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Optionally, an R&S EX-IQ-BOX can be connected to the Digital Baseband Interface to convert signal properties and the transmission protocol of the R&S FSW into user- defined or standardized signal formats and vice versa. Since the Digital I/Q input and the Analog Baseband input use the same digital signal path, both cannot be used simultaneously.
  • Page 63 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour 4.2.2.15 External Generator Control Option (R&S FSW-B10) The external generator control option provides an additional GPIB and an "AUX con- trol" connector. The GPIB connector can be used to connect the external generator to the R&S FSW. The female "AUX control"...

  • Page 64: Trying Out The Instrument

    ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Connector Reference signal Usage REF INPUT 1...20 MHz To provide an external reference signal on the R&S FSW. 0...10 dBm REF OUTPUT 1...20 MHz To provide the same external reference signal received by the REF INPUT 1...20 MHz connector to another device, 0...10 dBm when available.

  • Page 65: Measuring A Basic Signal

    ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument ● Zooming into the Display..................71 ● Saving Settings....................... 75 ● Printing and Saving Results..................76 4.3.1 Measuring a Basic Signal We will start out by measuring a basic signal, using the internal calibration signal as the input.
  • Page 66 ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Instrument warmup time Note that the instrument requires an initial warmup time after switching it on. A mes- sage in the status bar ("Instrument warming up...") indicates that the operating temper- ature has not yet been reached. Wait until this message is no longer displayed before you start a measurement.

  • Page 67: Displaying A Spectrogram

    ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument 4.3.2 Displaying a Spectrogram In addition to the standard "level versus frequency" spectrum display, the R&S FSW also provides a spectrogram display of the measured data. A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time. The x-axis shows the frequency, the y- axis shows the time.

  • Page 68: Activating Additional Measurement Channels

    ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument You see the spectrogram compared to the standard spectrum display. Since the calibration signal does not change over time, the color of the frequency levels does not change over time, i.e. vertically. The legend at the top of the spectrogram win- dow describes the power levels the colors represent.
  • Page 69 ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Figure 4-8: Adding a new measurement channel 3. Change the frequency range for this spectrum display: In the "Frequency" dialog box, set the center frequency to 500 MHz and the span to 1 GHz. Figure 4-9: Frequency spectrum of the calibration signal with a larger span 4.
  • Page 70 ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument As the calibration signal does not vary over time, the level versus time diagram dis- plays a straight line. Figure 4-10: Time domain display of the calibration signal 5. Create a new channel for I/Q analysis: a) Press the [Mode] key.

  • Page 71: Performing Sequential Measurements

    ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument e) Close the SmartGrid mode. The "IQ Analyzer" channel displays the real and imaginary signal parts in separate windows. To display the MultiView tab An overview of all active channels is provided in the "MultiView" tab. This tab is always displayed and cannot be closed.

  • Page 72: Setting And Moving A Marker

    ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Figure 4-13: "MultiView" tab with active Sequencer Figure 4-13, the "Spectrum 2" measurement is currently active (indicated by the "channel active" icon in the tab label). 3. Stop the Sequencer by tapping the "Sequencer" softkey again. 4.3.5 Setting and Moving a Marker Markers are useful to determine the position of particular effects in the trace.

  • Page 73: Displaying A Marker Peak List

    ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument 6. Now you can move the marker by tapping and dragging it to a different position. The current position is indicated by a dotted blue line. Notice how the position and value change in the marker area of the diagram. 4.3.6 Displaying a Marker Peak List The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum automatically.

  • Page 74: Zooming Into The Display

    ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument 2. Press the "RUN SINGLE" key on the front panel to perform a single sweep for which we will determine the peaks. Tap the "SmartGrid" icon in the toolbar to activate SmartGrid mode. 4.
  • Page 75 ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Tap the "Multiple Zoom" icon in the toolbar. The icon is highlighted orange to indicate that multiple zoom mode is active. 2. Tap the diagram near the first peak and drag your finger to the opposite corner of the zoom area.
  • Page 76 ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument 3. In Figure 4-16, the enlarged peak is represented by a very thick trace. This is due to the insufficient number of sweep points. The missing sweep points for the zoomed display are interpolated, which provides poor results. To optimize the results, we will increase the number of sweep points from the default 1001 to 32001.
  • Page 77 ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Figure 4-18: Multiple zoom windows 5. Tap the "Multiple Zoom" icon in the toolbar again and define a zoom area around marker M8. 6. To increase the size of the third zoom window, drag the "splitter" between the win- dows to the left or right or up or down.

  • Page 78: Saving Settings

    ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Figure 4-19: Enlarged zoom window 4.3.8 Saving Settings To restore the results of our measurements later, we will store the instrument settings to a file. To save the instrument settings to a file Tap the "Save"...

  • Page 79: Printing And Saving Results

    ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Figure 4-20: Saving the instrument settings to a file 4. Tap the "Save" button. The file MyMultiViewSetup.dfl is stored in the default directory C:/R_S/ instr/user. To load stored instrument settings You can restore the settings to the instrument at any time using the settings file. 1.

  • Page 80: Operating The Instrument

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument To export the trace data 1. Press the [TRACE] key on the front panel. 2. Tap the "Trace Config" softkey. 3. Tap the "Trace Export" tab. 4. Tap the "Export Trace to ASCII File" button. 5.

  • Page 81: Understanding The Display Information

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Risk of touchscreen damage Inappropriate tools or excessive force can damage the touchscreen. Observe the following instructions when operating the touchscreen: ● Never touch the screen with ball point pens or other sharp objects, use your fingers instead.
  • Page 82 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument = Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2+3 = Window title bar with diagram-specific (trace) information = Diagram area with marker information = Diagram footer with diagram-specific information, depending on measurement application = Instrument status bar with error messages, progress bar and date/time display Hiding elements in the display You can hide some of the elements in the display, for example the status bar or chan-...
  • Page 83 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument If many tabs are displayed, select the tab selection list icon at the right end of the chan- nel bar. Select the channel you want to switch to from the list. MultiView tab An additional tab labeled "MultiView"...
  • Page 84 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Channel-specific settings Beneath the channel name, information on channel-specific settings for the measure- ment is displayed in the channel bar. Channel information varies depending on the active application. In the Spectrum application, the R&S FSW shows the following settings: Table 4-4: Channel settings displayed in the channel bar in the Spectrum application Ref Level Reference level...
  • Page 85 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument The following types of information are displayed, if applicable. Table 4-5: Common settings displayed in the channel bar "SGL" The sweep is set to single sweep mode. "Sweep The current signal count for measurement tasks that involve a specific number of subse- Count"...
  • Page 86 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Changing the Channel Name The measurement channels are labeled with their default name. If that name already exists, a sequential number is added. You can change the name of the measurement channel by double-tapping the name in the channel bar and entering a new name. For an overview of default names, see Table 13-2.
  • Page 87 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument (4) Trace Mode Sweep mode: Clrw CLEAR/WRITE MAX HOLD MIN HOLD AVERAGE (Lin/Log/Pwr) View VIEW (5) Smoothing factor Smth Smoothing factor, if enabled. (See " Smoothing " on page 561) Norm/NCor Correction data is not used. 4.4.1.3 Marker Information Marker information is provided either in the diagram grid or in a separate marker table,...
  • Page 88 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Signal count Signal tracking NOIse Noise measurement MDepth AM modulation depth Third order intercept measurement 4.4.1.4 Frequency and Span Information in Diagram Footer The information in the diagram footer (beneath the diagram) depends on the current application, measurement, and result display.
  • Page 89 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument The optional Digital Baseband Interface (R&S FSW-B17) is being used to provide digital output. For details on the Digital Baseband Interface (R&S FSW-B17), see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual. The optional Digital I/Q 40G Streaming Output Connector (R&S FSW-B517) is being IQ 40G used to provide digital output.
  • Page 90 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Color Type Description No color No errors No message displayed - normal operation. Green Measurement Some applications visualize that the measurement was successful by show- successful ing a message. If any error information is available for a channel, an exclamation mark is displayed next to the channel name ( ).

  • Page 91: Accessing The Functionality

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument RF OVLD Overload of the input mixer or of the analog IF path. ● Increase the RF attenuation (for RF input). ● Reduce the input level (for digital input) UNCAL One of the following conditions applies: ●...
  • Page 92 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Table 4-8: Standard Application Functions in the Toolbar Icon Description Windows: displays the Windows "Start" menu and task bar Open: opens a file from the instrument ("Save/Recall" menu) Store: stores data on the instrument ("Save/Recall" menu) Print: defines print settings ("Print"...
  • Page 93 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Icon Description Print immediately: prints the current display (screenshot) as configured In "SmartGrid" mode only: Exit "SmartGrid" mode 4.4.2.2 Softkeys Softkeys are virtual keys provided by the software. Thus, more functions can be provi- ded than those that can be accessed directly via the function keys on the instrument.
  • Page 94 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 4.4.2.4 On-screen Keyboard The on-screen keyboard is an additional means of interacting with the instrument with- out having to connect an external keyboard. The on-screen keyboard display can be switched on and off as desired using the "On- Screen Keyboard"...

  • Page 95: Changing The Focus

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 4.4.3 Changing the Focus Any selected function is always performed on the currently focused element in the dis- play, e.g. a dialog field, diagram, or table row. Which element is focused is indicated by a blue frame (diagram, window, table) or is otherwise highlighted (softkey, marker etc.).
  • Page 96 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 1. Enter the parameter value using the keypad, or change the currently used parame- ter value by using the rotary knob (small steps) or the [UP] or [DOWN] keys (large steps). 2. After entering the numeric value via keypad, press the corresponding unit key. The unit is added to the entry.

  • Page 97: Touchscreen Gestures

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument To complete the entry ► Press the [ENTER] key or the rotary knob. To abort the entry ► Press the [ESC] key. The dialog box is closed without changing the settings. Table 4-9: Keys for alphanumeric parameters Key name Series of (special) characters and number provided (upper inscription)
  • Page 98 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Figure 4-21: Tapping Double-tapping Tap the screen twice, in quick succession. Double-tap a diagram or the window title bar to maximize a window in the display, or to restore the original size. Dragging Move your finger from one position to another on the display, keeping your finger on the display the whole time.

  • Page 99: Displaying Results

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Mouse vs. touch actions Any user interface elements that react to actions by a mouse pointer also react to fin- ger gestures on the screen, and vice versa. The following touch actions correspond to mouse actions: Table 4-10: Correlation of mouse and touch actions Mouse operation...
  • Page 100 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument An additional tab ("MultiView") provides an overview of all currently active channels at once. Only one measurement can be performed at any time, namely the one in the currently active channel. However, in order to perform the configured measurements consecu- tively, a Sequencer function is provided.
  • Page 101 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument To close a measurement channel ► Select the "Close" icon on the tab of the measurement channel. The tab is closed, any running measurements are aborted, and all results for that channel are deleted. Remote command: on page 784 INSTrument:DELete...
  • Page 102 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Background Information: The SmartGrid Principle SmartGrid display During any positioning action, the underlying SmartGrid is displayed. Different colors and frames indicate the possible new positions. The position in the SmartGrid where you drop the window determines its position on the screen. Figure 4-23: Moving a window in SmartGrid mode The brown area indicates the possible "drop area"...
  • Page 103 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Figure 4-24: SmartGrid window positions 1 = Insert row above or below the existing row 2 = Create a new column in the existing row 3 = Replace a window in the existing row SmartGrid functions Once the evaluation icon has been dropped, icons in each window provide delete and move functions.
  • Page 104 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 1. Activate SmartGrid mode. All evaluation methods available for the currently selected measurement are dis- played as icons in the evaluation bar. 2. Select the icon for the required evaluation method from the evaluation bar. If the evaluation bar contains more icons than can be displayed at once on the screen, it can be scrolled vertically.
  • Page 105 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Remote command: on page 949 / LAYout:REPLace[:WINDow] LAYout:WINDow<n>:REPLace on page 952 on page 948 LAYout:MOVE[:WINDow] 4.4.6.3 Changing the Size of Windows Each channel tab may contain several windows to evaluate the measurement results using different methods.

  • Page 106: Getting Help

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument useful to maximize an individual window to the entire screen temporarily in order to analyze the results in more detail. To switch between a split and a maximized display without having to close and re-open windows, press the [SPLIT/MAXIMIZE] key on the front panel.
  • Page 107 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument The "Help" dialog box "View" tab is displayed. A topic containing information about the focused screen element is displayed. If no context-specific help topic is available, a more general topic or the "Content" tab is displayed.

  • Page 108: Remote Control

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 2. Select the "Keyboard" icon besides the entry field. 3. Enter the first characters of the keyword you are interested in. The entries containing these characters are displayed. 4. Double-tap the suitable index entry. The "View"...
  • Page 109 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 4.4.8.1 Using the LXI Browser Interface in a LAN LAN eXtensions for Instrumentation (LXI) is an instrumentation platform for measuring instruments and test systems that is based on standard Ethernet technology. LXI is intended to be the LAN-based successor to GPIB, combining the advantages of Ether- net with the simplicity and familiarity of GPIB.
  • Page 110 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 4.4.8.2 Remote Desktop Connection Remote Desktop is a Windows application which can be used to access and control the instrument from a remote computer through a LAN connection. While the instru- ment is in operation, the instrument screen contents are displayed on the remote com- puter.

  • Page 111: Applications, Measurement Channels, And Operating Modes

    ® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S 5 Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes The R&S FSW allows you to perform all sorts of different analysis tasks on different types of signals, e.g. W-CDMA, I/Q analysis or basic spectrum analysis. Depending on the task or type of signal, a different set of measurement functions and parameters are required.

  • Page 112: Available Applications

    ® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Available Applications Standard Radio Analyzer, unwanted correlations between different signal components using different transmission standards can be detected. Thus, for example, an irregu- larity in a GSM burst can be examined closer in the R&S FSW 3G FDD BTS (W- CDMA) slave application to reveal dependencies like a change in the EVM value.

  • Page 113: Spectrum

    ® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Available Applications For details on the MSRT operating mode, see the R&S FSW Real-Time Spectrum Application and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual. Spectrogram application Spectrogram measurements are not a separate application, but rather a trace evalua- tion method, thus they are available as an evaluation method for the Display Configu- ration, not by creating a new channel.

  • Page 114: 1Xev-Do Bts

    ® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Available Applications Remote command: INST:SEL SAN, see on page 787 INSTrument[:SELect] 1xEV-DO BTS The 1xEV-DO BTS application requires an instrument equipped with the 1xEV-DO BTS Measurements option, R&S FSW-K84. This application provides test measurements for 1xEV-DO BTS downlink signals (base station signals) according to the test specifi- cation.

  • Page 115: Amplifier

    ® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Available Applications 802.11ad The 802.11ad application requires an instrument equipped with the 802.11ad option, R&S FSW-K95. This application provides measurements and evaluations according to the IEEE 802.11ad standard. For details see the R&S FSW-K95 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL WIGIG, see on page 787...

  • Page 116: (Multi-Carrier) Group Delay

    ® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Available Applications (Multi-Carrier) Group Delay The Group Delay application requires an instrument equipped with the Multi-Carrier Group Delay Measurements option R&S FSW-K17. This application provides a Multi- Carrier Group Delay measurement. For details see the R&S FSW-K17 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL MCGD, see on page 787...

  • Page 117: Oneweb

    ® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Available Applications OneWeb The OneWeb application requires an instrument equipped with the OneWeb measure- ments option R&S FSW-K201. This application provides OneWeb reverse link mea- surements. For details see the R&S FSW-K201 (OneWeb Reverse Link Measurements) User Man- ual.

  • Page 118: Td-Scdma Ue

    ® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Available Applications For details see the R&S FSW-K76/-K77 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL BTDS, see on page 787 INSTrument[:SELect] TD-SCDMA UE The TD-SCDMA UE application requires an instrument equipped with the TD-SCDMA User Equipment Measurements option, R&S FSW-K77.

  • Page 119: R&S Multiview

    ® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Applications DOCSIS 3.1 The DOCSIS 3.1 application requires an instrument equipped with the DOCSIS 3.1 option, R&S FSW-K192. This application provides measurements and evaluations according to the DOCSIS 3.1 standard. For details see the R&S FSW-K192 User Manual.
  • Page 120 ® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Applications The default application in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode is a Spectrum measure- ment. Switching between applications When you switch to a new application, a set of parameters is passed on from the cur- rent application to the new one: ●...

  • Page 121: Running A Sequence Of Measurements

    ® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Running a Sequence of Measurements Remote command: on page 787 INSTrument[:SELect] New Channel ← Selecting an application The applications selected on this tab are started in a new measurement channel, i.e. a new tab in the display.

  • Page 122: The Sequencer Concept

    ® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Running a Sequence of Measurements 5.4.1 The Sequencer Concept The instrument can only activate one specific channel at any time. Thus, only one measurement can be performed at any time, namely the one in the currently active channel.
  • Page 123 ® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Running a Sequence of Measurements Example: Sequencer procedure Assume the following active channel definition: Tab name Application Sweep mode Sweep count Spectrum Spectrum Cont. Sweep Spectrum 2 Spectrum Single Sweep Spectrum 3 Spectrum Cont.

  • Page 124: Sequencer Settings

    ® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Running a Sequence of Measurements The "Single Sweep" and "Continuous Sweep" softkeys control the sweep mode for the currently selected channel only; the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel, and only for a channel-defined sequence.

  • Page 125: How To Set Up The Sequencer

    ® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Running a Sequence of Measurements Remote command: on page 789 INITiate<n>:SEQuencer:MODE 5.4.3 How to Set Up the Sequencer In order to perform the configured measurements consecutively, a Sequencer function is provided. 1. Configure a channel for each measurement configuration as required, including the sweep mode.

  • Page 126: Measurements And Results

    ® Measurements and Results R&S 6 Measurements and Results Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" Or: [MEAS] In the Spectrum application, the R&S FSW provides a variety of different measurement functions. ● Basic measurements - measure the spectrum of your signal or watch your signal in time domain ●...

  • Page 127: Basic Measurements

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements Measurements on I/Q-based data The I/Q Analyzer application (not Master) in MSRA mode can also perform measure- ments on the captured I/Q data in the time and frequency domain. The measurements are configured using the same settings as described here for the Spectrum application.

  • Page 128: How To Perform A Basic Sweep Measurement

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements Frequency Sweep A common frequency sweep of the input signal over a specified span. Can be used for general purposes to obtain basic measurement results such as peak levels and spec- trum traces. The "Frequency" menu is displayed. This is the default measurement if no other function is selected.

  • Page 129: Measurement Examples - Measuring A Sinusoidal Signal

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements 2. Configure the number of sweeps to be performed in a single measurement ( "Sweep Config" dialog box, see " Sweep/Average Count " on page 449). 3. If necessary, configure how the signal is processed internally ( "Bandwidth" dialog box, see "...
  • Page 130 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements High input values If levels higher than +30 dBm (=1 W) are expected or are possible, a power attenuator must be inserted before the RF input of the analyzer. Otherwise, signal levels exceed- ing 30 dBm can damage the RF attenuator or the input mixer.
  • Page 131 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements Increasing the Frequency Resolution The frequency resolution of the marker is determined by the resolution of the trace. A trace consists of 1001 trace points, i.e. if the frequency span is 1 MHz, each trace point represents a span of approximately 1 kHz.

  • Page 132: Measurement Example - Measuring Levels At Low S/N Ratios

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements 6.1.3.2 Measuring the Signal Frequency Using the Signal Counter The built-in signal counter allows you to measure the frequency more accurately than measuring it with the marker. The frequency sweep is stopped at the marker, and the R&S FSW measures the frequency of the signal at the marker position (see also Chap- ter 8.3.4.1, "Precise Frequency (Signal Count)
  • Page 133 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements The displayed noise level of a signal analyzer depends on its noise figure, the selected RF attenuation, the selected reference level, the selected resolution and video band- width and the detector. For details see: ●...
  • Page 134 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements The traces of consecutive sweeps are averaged. To perform averaging, the R&S FSW automatically switches on the sample detector. The RF signal, therefore, can be more clearly distinguished from noise. Figure 6-2: RF sine wave signal with low S/N ratio with an averaged trace 6.

  • Page 135: Measurement Examples - Measuring Signal Spectra With Multiple Signals

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements 7. By reducing the resolution bandwidth by a factor of 10, the noise is reduced by 10 dB. Set the RBW to 100 kHz. The displayed noise is reduced by approximately 10 dB. The signal, therefore, emerges from noise by about 10 dB.
  • Page 136 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements is equal to the frequency spacing, the spectrum display shows a level drop of 3 dB pre- cisely in the center of the two signals. Decreasing the resolution bandwidth makes the level drop larger, which thus makes the individual signals clearer. In this measurement example we will analyze two signals with a level of -30 dBm each and a frequency spacing of 30 kHz.
  • Page 137 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements Figure 6-6: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with the resolution band- width which corresponds to the frequency spacing of the signals Matching generator and R&S FSW frequencies The level drop is located exactly in the center of the display only if the generator frequencies match the frequency display of the R&S FSW exactly.
  • Page 138 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements Figure 6-7: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with a resolution band- width which is larger than their frequency spacing 6. Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 kHz. The two generator signals are shown with high resolution. However, the sweep time becomes longer.
  • Page 139 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements Figure 6-8: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with a resolution band- width (1 kHz) which is significantly smaller than their frequency spacing 6.1.5.2 Measuring the Modulation Depth of an AM-Modulated Carrier in the Frequency Domain In the frequency range display, the AM side bands can be resolved with a narrow bandwidth and measured separately.
  • Page 140 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements 1. Select [PRESET] to reset the instrument. 2. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz. 3. Set the frequency span to 50 kHz. 4. Select [MEAS] > "AM Modulation Depth" to activate the modulation depth mea- surement.
  • Page 141 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements Figure 6-11: Test setup Table 6-5: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW) Frequency 128 MHz Level -30 dBm Modulation 50 % AM, 1 kHz AF 1. Select [PRESET] to reset the instrument. 2. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz. 3.

  • Page 142: Measurement Examples In Zero Span

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements Figure 6-12: Measurement of the AF signal of a carrier that is AM-modulated with 1 kHz 7. Activate the internal AM demodulator to output the audio signal. a) Press the [MKR FUNC] key. b) Select "Marker Demodulation"...
  • Page 143 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements 6.1.6.1 Measuring the Power Characteristic of Burst Signals To measure power in zero span, the R&S FSW offers easy-to-use functions that mea- sure the power over a predefined time. Measuring the Power of a GSM Burst During the Activation Phase Figure 6-13: Test setup Table 6-6: Signal generator settings (e.g.
  • Page 144 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements By turning the rotary knob clockwise, move the vertical line "S1" to the start of the burst. g) Select the "Right Limit" input field. h) By turning the rotary knob clockwise, move the vertical line "S2" to the end of the burst.
  • Page 145 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements Table 6-7: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW) Frequency 890 MHz Level 0 dBm Modulation GSM, one timeslot activated The measurement is based on the example "Measuring the Power of a GSM Burst During the Activation Phase"...
  • Page 146 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements The R&S FSW displays the falling edge of the GSM burst. Figure 6-17: Falling edge of the GSM burst displayed with high time resolution 6.1.6.2 Measuring the Signal-to-Noise Ratio of Burst Signals When TDMA transmission methods are used, the signal-to-noise ratio or the dynamic range for deactivation can be measured by comparing the power values during the activation phase and the deactivation phase of the transmission burst.
  • Page 147 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements 1. Select [PRESET] to reset the instrument. 2. Set the center frequency to 890 MHz. 3. Set the frequency span to 0 Hz. 4. Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz. 5. Set the reference level to 0 dBm (= level of the signal generator). 6.

  • Page 148: Channel Power And Adjacent-Channel Power (Aclr) Measurement

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Figure 6-19: Measurement of the signal-to-noise ratio of a GSM burst signal in zero span 10. Note down the power result for the measured noise, indicated by the "TD Pow RMS"...

  • Page 149: About Channel Power Measurements

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement 6.2.1 About Channel Power Measurements Measuring channel power and adjacent channel power is one of the most important tasks during signal analysis with the necessary test routines in the field of digital trans- mission.
  • Page 150 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Results are provided for the TX channel and the number of defined adjacent channels above and below the TX channel. If more than one TX channel is defined, you must specify the channel to which the relative adjacent-channel power values refer.

  • Page 151: Channel Power Basics

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement The measured power values for the TX and adjacent channels are also output as a table in the Result Summary window. Which powers are measured depends on the number of configured channels.
  • Page 152 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement adjacent channel to the power of the carrier channel. An ACLR measurement with sev- eral carrier channels (also known as transmission or TX channels) is also possible and is referred to as a multicarrier ACLR measurement.
  • Page 153 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement fore, most of the samples taken during the sweep time cannot be used for channel power or ACLR calculation. To decrease the measurement times, the R&S FSW offers a "Fast ACLR" mode. In Fast ACLR mode, the power of the frequency range between the channels of interest is not measured, because it is not required for channel power or ACLR calculation.
  • Page 154 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement <sweep time in channel> * <selected resolution bandwidth> For example, for a sweep time of 100 ms the analyzer considers (30 kHz / 4.19 MHz) * 100 ms * 10 kHz ≈ 7 samples. Whereas in Fast ACLR mode, it considers (100 ms / 5) * 30 kHz ≈...
  • Page 155 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement 6.2.3.3 Recommended Common Measurement Parameters The following sections provide recommendations on the most important measurement parameters for channel power measurements. All instrument settings for the selected channel setup (channel bandwidth, channel spacing) can be optimized automatically using the "Adjust Settings"...
  • Page 156 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement means uncorrelated samples) decorr The number of uncorrelated samples per trace pixel is obtained by dividing N decorr 1001 (= pixels per trace). The "Sweep Time" can be defined using the softkey in the "Ch Power" menu or in the "Sweep"...
  • Page 157 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement If the spectrum within the channel to be measured and the spectrum around the chan- nel has a flat characteristic, you can select a larger resolution bandwidth. In the stan- dard setting, e.g.
  • Page 158 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement     Where: = linear digitized video voltage at the output of the A/D converter N = number of A/D converter values per measurement point = power represented by a measurement point When the power has been calculated, the power units are converted into decibels and the value is displayed as a measurement point.
  • Page 159 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement that allows you to measure such MSR signals, including non-contiguous setups. Multi- ple (also non-) contiguous transmit channels can be specified at absolute frequencies, independent from the common center frequency selected for display. Signal structure Up to 18 transmit channels can be grouped in a maximum of 5 sub blocks.
  • Page 160 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Figure 6-25: Sub block definition As opposed to common ACLR channel definitions, the Tx channels are defined at absolute frequencies, rather than by a spacing relative to the (common) center fre- quency.
  • Page 161 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Figure 6-26: Gap channel definition for lower gap According to the MSR standard, the Cumulative Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio (CACLR) power must be determined for the gap channels. The CACLR power is mea- sured in the two gap channels for the upper and lower gap.
  • Page 162 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement The upper and lower adjacent channels can also be defined asymmetrically (see " Symmetrical Adjacent Setup " on page 175). This is particularly useful if the lowest Tx channel and highest Tx channel use different standards and thus require different bandwidths for adjacent channel power measurement.

  • Page 163: Channel Power Configuration

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Figure 6-27: Result summary for asymmetrical channel definition Remote command: CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? GACLr or CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? MACM , see on page 797 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? Restrictions and dependencies As the signal structure in multi-standard radio signals can vary considerably, you can define the channels very flexibly for the ACLR measurement with the R&S FSW.
  • Page 164 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap- ter 13.5.3, "Measuring the Channel Power and ACLR", on page 802. ● General CP/ACLR Measurement Settings............161 ●...
  • Page 165 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Standard The main measurement settings can be stored as a standard file. When such a stan- dard is loaded, the required channel and general measurement settings are automati- cally set on the R&S FSW.
  • Page 166 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Note: User standards created on an analyzer of the R&S FSP family are compatible to the R&S FSW. User standards created on an R&S FSW, however, are not necessarily compatible to the analyzers of the R&S FSP family and may not work there.
  • Page 167 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Reference Channel The measured power values in the adjacent channels can be displayed relative to the transmission channel. If more than one Tx channel is defined, define which one is used as a reference channel.
  • Page 168 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Selected Trace The CP/ACLR measurement can be performed on any active trace. Remote command: on page 802 [SENSe:]POWer:TRACe Absolute and Relative Values (ACLR Mode) The powers of the adjacent channels are output in dBm or dBm/Hz (absolute values), or in dBc, relative to the specified reference Tx channel.
  • Page 169 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Note: In adjacent-channel power measurement, the power is always referenced to a transmission channel (see " Reference Channel " on page 164), thus, this function is not available. Remote command: on page 811 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE...
  • Page 170 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement The following settings are available in individual subtabs of the "Channel Settings" tab. Channel Bandwidth ....................167 Channel Spacings ...................... 168 Limit Check ........................ 168 Weighting Filters ......................169 Channel Names ......................
  • Page 171 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Remote command: on page 806 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth[:CHANnel<ch>] on page 805 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel on page 805 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ALTernate<ch> Channel Spacings Channel spacings are normally defined by the transmission standard but can be changed.
  • Page 172 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement The results of the power limit checks are also indicated in the STAT:QUES:ACPL sta- tus registry (see "STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register" on page 731). Remote command: on page 817 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe] on page 813 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe on page 812...

  • Page 173: Msr Aclr Configuration

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Remote command: on page 806 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ACHannel on page 806 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<ch> on page 806 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:CHANnel<ch> 6.2.5 MSR ACLR Configuration Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Channel Power ACLR" > "CP / ACLR Standard"...
  • Page 174 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Standard ........................171 └ Predefined Standards .................. 172 └ User Standards .................... 172 Number of Sub Blocks ....................173 Reference Channel ....................173 Noise Cancellation ..................... 173 Selected Trace ......................
  • Page 175 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Predefined Standards ← Standard Predefined standards contain the main measurement settings for standard measure- ments. When such a standard is loaded, the required channel settings are automati- cally set on the R&S FSW. However, the settings can be changed. The predefined standards contain the following settings: ●...
  • Page 176 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Save the current measurement settings as a user-defined standard, load a stored mea- surement configuration, or delete an existing configuration file. For details see Chapter 6.2.6.4, "How to Manage User-Defined Configurations", on page 189.
  • Page 177 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency, resolu- tion bandwidth and level setting. Therefore, the correction function is disabled when- ever one of these parameters is changed. A disable message is displayed on the screen.
  • Page 178 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Power Mode The measured power values can be displayed directly for each trace ( "Clear/ Write" ), or only the maximum values over a series of measurements can be displayed ( "Max Hold"...
  • Page 179 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement 6.2.5.2 MSR Sub Block and Tx Channel Definition Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Channel Power ACLR" > "CP / ACLR Standard" > "Standard" : "Multi-Standard Radio" > "CP / ACLR Config" > "Tx Chan- nels"...
  • Page 180 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Sub Block Definition Sub blocks are groups of transmit channels in an MSR signal. Up to five sub blocks can be defined. They are defined as an RF bandwidth around a center frequency with a specific number of transmit channels (max.
  • Page 181 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Technology Used for Transmission ← Tx Channel Definition The technology used for transmission by the individual channel can be defined for each channel. The required channel bandwidth and use of a weighting filter are pre- configured automatically according to the selected technology standard.
  • Page 182 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement For symmetrical channel definition (see " Symmetrical Adjacent Setup " on page 175), the dialog box is reduced as the upper and lower channels are identical. Figure 6-28: Asymmetrical adjacent channel definition For details on setting up channels, see Chapter 6.2.6.3, "How to Configure an MSR ACLR...
  • Page 183 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Adjacent Channel Definition Defines the channels adjacent to the transmission channel block in MSR signals. A maximum of 12 adjacent channels can be defined. For MSR signals, adjacent channels are defined in relation to the center frequency of the first and last transmission channel in the entire block, i.e.: ●...
  • Page 184 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement on page 810 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALTernate<ch> on page 826 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UACHannel on page 826 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UALTernate<ch> Alpha value: on page 808 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ACHannel on page 809 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ALTernate<ch> on page 825 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:UACHannel on page 825 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:UALTernate<ch>...
  • Page 185 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement For details on MSR signals, see Chapter 6.2.3.4, "Measurement on Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) Signals", on page 155. For details on setting up channels, see Chapter 6.2.6.3, "How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement", on page 187.
  • Page 186 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Gap Channel Definition Between two sub blocks in an MSR signal, two gaps are defined: a lower gap and an upper gap. Each gap in turn contains two channels, the gap channels. The channels in the upper gap are identical to those in the lower gap, but inverted.
  • Page 187 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Limit Checking ← Gap Channel Definition During an ACLR measurement, the power values can be checked whether they exceed user-defined or standard-defined limits. A relative or absolute limit can be defined, or both, for each individual gap channel.

  • Page 188: How To Perform Channel Power Measurements

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Figure 6-29: Channel name definition for asymmetric adjacent channels Remote command: on page 832 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:NAME[:CHANnel<ch>] on page 806 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ACHannel on page 806 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<ch> on page 831 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:UACHannel on page 831 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:UALTernate<ch>...
  • Page 189 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement ● How to Perform a Standard Channel Power Measurement........186 ● How to Set Up the Channels.................186 ● How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement...........187 ● How to Manage User-Defined Configurations............189 ●...
  • Page 190 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Changes to an existing standard can be stored as a user-defined standard, see Chap- ter 6.2.6.4, "How to Manage User-Defined Configurations", on page 189. ► To configure the channels in the "Ch Power" dialog box, select "Ch Power" > "CP / ACLR Config"...
  • Page 191 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement 5. Select the "CP / ACLR Config" softkey to configure general MSR settings, including the number of sub blocks (up to 5). To configure asymmetric adjacent channels, deactivate the "Symmetrical" option in the general MSR settings.
  • Page 192 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement 12. Optionally, store the settings for the MSR ACLR measurement as a user-defined standard as described in "To store a user-defined configuration" on page 189. Oth- erwise the configuration is lost when you select a different measurement standard. 6.2.6.4 How to Manage User-Defined Configurations You can define measurement configurations independently of a predefined standard...

  • Page 193: Measurement Examples

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement 6.2.6.5 How to Compare the Tx Channel Power in Successive Measurements For power measurements with only one Tx channel and no adjacent channels, you can define a fixed reference power and compare subsequent measurement results to the stored reference power.
  • Page 194 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW): Frequency: 850 MHz Level: 0 dBm Modulation: CDMA2000 Procedure: 1. Preset the R&S FSW. 2. Set the center frequency to 850 MHz. 3.
  • Page 195 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Figure 6-30: Adjacent channel power measurement on a CDMA2000 signal 6.2.7.2 Measurement Example 2 – Measuring Adjacent Channel Power of a W-CDMA Uplink Signal Test setup: Signal R&S FSW Generator Signal generator settings (e.g.
  • Page 196 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement The R&S FSW sets the channel configuration to the W-CDMA standard for mobiles with two adjacent channels above and below the transmit channel. The frequency span, the resolution and video bandwidth and the detector are automatically set to the correct values.
  • Page 197 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Figure 6-32: Dynamic range for ACLR measurements on W-CDMA uplink signals as a function of the mixer level The level of the W-CDMA signal at the input mixer is shown on the horizontal axis, i.e. the measured signal level minus the selected RF attenuation.
  • Page 198 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement 6.2.7.3 Measurement Example 3 – Measuring the Intrinsic Noise of the R&S FSW with the Channel Power Function Noise in any bandwidth can be measured with the channel power measurement func- tions.

  • Page 199: Optimizing And Troubleshooting The Measurement

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Figure 6-33: Measurement of the R&S FSW's intrinsic noise power in a 1.23 MHz channel band- width. 6.2.8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement If the results do not meet your expectations, or if you want to minimize the measure- ment duration, try the following methods to optimize the measurement: ●...

  • Page 200: Reference: Predefined Cp/Aclr Standards

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Note, however, that for TDP measurements, channel filters are not available and a fixed RBW is used. Thus, the measurement may not be according to standard for some test cases. 6.2.9 Reference: Predefined CP/ACLR Standards When using predefined standards for ACLR measurement, the test parameters for the channel and adjacent-channel measurements are configured automatically.

  • Page 201: Reference: Predefined Aclr User Standard Xml Files

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Standard Remote parameter CDPD CDPD APCO-25 P2 PAPCo25 User Standard USER Customized Standard <string> For the R&S FSW, the channel spacing is defined as the distance between the center frequency of the adjacent channel and the center frequency of the transmission chan- nel.

  • Page 202: Carrier-To-Noise Measurements

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Carrier-to-Noise Measurements ● WLAN\802_11ac\802_11ac_80MHZ.XML ● WLAN\802_11ac\802_11ac_160MHZ.XML To load a stored measurement configuration, in the "General Settings" tab of the "ACLR Setup" dialog box, select the "Manage User Standards" button to display the "Manage" dialog box. Select the user standard file, then "Load" . The stored settings are automatically set on the R&S FSW and the measurement is restarted with the new parameters.

  • Page 203: Carrier-To-Noise Results

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Carrier-to-Noise Measurements ● The carrier is inside the analyzed channel: In this case, the measurement must be performed in two steps: – First, perform the reference measurement by switching on either the C/N or the measurement and waiting for the end of the next measurement run.

  • Page 204: Carrier-To-Noise Configuration

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Carrier-to-Noise Measurements 6.3.3 Carrier-to-Noise Configuration Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "C/N" / "C/N0" > "Carrier Noise Config" Both a carrier-to-noise ratio (C/N) and a carrier-to-noise ratio in relation to the band- width (C/N ) measurement are available. Carrier-to-noise measurements are not available in zero span mode.

  • Page 205: How To Determine The Carrier-To-Noise Ratio

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Carrier-to-Noise Measurements The measurement is performed on the trace that marker 1 is assigned to. To shift marker 1 and measure another trace, use the "Marker To Trace" softkey in the "Marker" menu (see " Assigning the Marker to a Trace " on page 326).

  • Page 206: Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (Obw)

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW) 5. If the carrier signal is located within the analyzed channel bandwidth, switch off the carrier signal so that only the noise is displayed in the channel and perform a sec- ond measurement.
  • Page 207 ® Measurements and Results R&S Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW) OBW within defined search limits - multicarrier OBW measurement in one sweep The occupied bandwidth of the signal can also be determined within defined search limits instead of for the entire signal. Thus, only a single sweep is required to determine the OBW for a multicarrier signal.

  • Page 208: Obw Results

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW) 6.4.2 OBW Results As a result of the OBW measurement the occupied bandwidth ( "Occ Bw" ) is indicated in the marker results. Furthermore, the marker at the center frequency and the tempo- rary markers are indicated.

  • Page 209: Obw Configuration

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW) returns the position and level of the temporary markers T1 and T2 used to calculate the occupied bandwidth. CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL OBW, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion: on page 800 POWer:SELect on page 801 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion: on page 797 POWer<sb>:RESult?
  • Page 210 ® Measurements and Results R&S Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW) The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap- ter 13.5.5, "Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth", on page 840. % Power Bandwidth ....................207 Channel Bandwidth ....................207 Adjust Settings ......................

  • Page 211: How To Determine The Occupied Bandwidth

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW) For details on limit lines for searches, see "Peak search limits" on page 525. Remote command: on page 1083 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 1083 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT on page 1083 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt Deactivating All Search Limits Deactivates the search range limits.

  • Page 212: Measurement Example

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW) 4. Define the percentage of power ( "% Power Bandwidth" ) that defines the band- width to be determined. 5. Define search limits so the search area contains only the first carrier signal: a) Enter values for the left or right limits, or both.

  • Page 213: Noise Power Ratio (Npr) Measurement

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement 12. Start a sweep. The result is displayed as OBW in the marker results. 6.5 Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement The R&S FSW noise power ratio measurement is similar to the common adjacent channel power (ACP) measurement, but less sophisticated and therefore easier to configure.
  • Page 214 ® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement ● Vertical green lines indicate notches and their bandwidth. The number of displayed notches is variable. Channel bandwidth, integration bandwidth and notch bandwidth Channel Bandwidth defines the width of the channel, or general measurement range.
  • Page 215 ® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement Channel Bandwidth Channel Bandwidth Integration Bandwidth Integration Bandwidth Notch 1 Notch 2 Notch 1 Notch 2 ≠ channel bandwidth (notches not deducted) Figure 6-35: Manual mode: Integration bandwidth Overlapping notches or notches outside the channel bandwidth Note that measurement results can become inaccurate when notches overlap or lie outside of the channel bandwidth.

  • Page 216: Npr Configuration

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement Parameter Description "Power density" Power measured in channel or notch divided by the "Channel BW"/"Integra- tion BW" in dBm/Hz "NPR" (Notches only:) Ratio of total channel power density to notch power density in Remote command: Channel power density, notch power density, power ratio: on page 845...
  • Page 217 ® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement Channel Bandwidth..................... 214 Integration Bandwidth....................214 Number of Notches..................... 214 Frequency Offset per Notch..................214 Notch Bandwidth (Absolute / Relative to Channel BW)..........214 Channel Bandwidth Defines the channel bandwidth on which the total power density is based. The band- width is positioned around the currently defined Center Frequency To specify a different bandwidth for total power density calculation, or to shift the band-...

  • Page 218: How To Perform Npr Measurements

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement Remote command: on page 844 [SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:BWIDth[:ABSolute] on page 844 [SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:BWIDth:RELative 6.5.4 How to Perform NPR Measurements Measuring the noise power ratio is a very easy and straightforward task with the R&S FSW.
  • Page 219 ® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement 1. From the "Overview" , select "Frequency" . 2. Define the "Center Frequency" = 500 MHz. 3. Define a "Span" = 80 MHz. 4. From the "Overview" , select "Select Measurement" . 5.

  • Page 220: Spectrum Emission Mask (Sem) Measurement

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 6.6 Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurements monitor compliance with a spectral mask. ● About the Measurement..................217 ● Typical Applications....................218 ● Results......................218 ● Basics......................221 ● Configuration....................

  • Page 221: Typical Applications

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement fined XML files are provided that contain ranges and parameters according to the selected standard. To improve the performance of the R&S FSW for spectrum emission mask measure- ments, a "Fast SEM" mode is available. A special limit check for SEM measurements allows for monitoring compliance of the spectrum.
  • Page 222 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Figure 6-36: Spectrum Emission Mask result displays In addition to the graphical results of the SEM measurement displayed in the diagram, a result summary is displayed to evaluate the limit check results (see also Chap- ter 6.6.4.2, "Limit Lines in SEM Measurements",...
  • Page 223 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement on page 247). By default, one peak per range is displayed. However, you can change the settings to display only peaks that exceed a threshold ( "Margin" ). Detected peaks are not only listed in the Result Summary, they are also indicated by colored squares in the diagram (optionally, see Show Peaks in the "List Evaluation"...

  • Page 224: Sem Basics

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Figure 6-38: SEM results for multiple sub blocks Retrieving results via remote control The measurement results of the spectrum emission mask test can be retrieved using the CALC:LIM:FAIL? command from a remote computer; see CALCulate<n>: on page 1148 for a detailed description.
  • Page 225 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 6.6.4.1 Ranges and Range Settings In the Spectrum Emission Mask measurements, a range defines a segment for which you can define the following parameters separately: ● Start and stop frequency ●...
  • Page 226 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement ● The maximum number of ranges is 30. ● The minimum number of ranges is 3. ● The reference range cannot be deleted. ● Center the reference range on the center frequency. ●...
  • Page 227 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement limits for the signal levels can be defined differently for varying input levels. For instance, for higher input levels a transmission standard can allow for higher power lev- els in adjacent channels, whereas for lower input levels the allowed deviation can be stricter.
  • Page 228 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Table 6-12: Limit check types Limit check type Pass/fail criteria Limit line definition "Absolute" Absolute power levels must not Defined by the "Abs Limit Start" / "Abs Limit exceed limit line Stop"...
  • Page 229 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check, a margin (threshold) for the peak values to be displayed in the Result Summary can be defined. (In the "List Evaluation"...
  • Page 230 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Fast SEM not supported for multiple sub blocks For SEM with multiple sub blocks, fast SEM is not available. If more than one sub block is defined and a standard is loaded which contains an active fast SEM setting, this setting is disabled.
  • Page 231 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 6.6.4.4 Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) SEM Measurements Multi-standard radio (MSR) measurements allow you to perform SEM tests on signals with multiple carriers using different digital standards. MSR measurements are descri- bed in the specification 3GPP TS 37.141. Various typical combinations of standards for base station tests are described, e.g.
  • Page 232 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Fast SEM not supported for multiple sub blocks For SEM with multiple sub blocks, fast SEM is not available. If more than one sub block is defined and a standard is loaded which contains an active fast SEM setting, this setting is disabled.
  • Page 233 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement This leads to the following combinations for overlapping ranges: ● "MAX" + "MAX" : maximum of the two limit lines is used ● "MAX" + "SUM" : maximum of the two limit lines is used ●...
  • Page 234 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Table 6-13: Limit lines in overlapping ranges crossing the mid-frequency Initial situation: overlapping ranges Result: Subranges 4a and 5a are created left and right of the mid-frequency; Range 4 ("None") + Range 5 ("None") overlap and cross the mid-frequency between sub blocks 1 and 2 For subrange 4a: limit line and parameters of range 4 apply For subrange 5a: limit line and parameters of range 5 apply...

  • Page 235: Sem Configuration

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 6.6.5 SEM Configuration Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spectrum Emission Mask" The SEM measurement is started immediately with the default settings. The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap- ter 13.5.7, "Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask",...
  • Page 236 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Range Start / Range Stop ..................233 Fast SEM ........................234 Filter Type ........................234 ...........................234 ........................... 234 Sweep Time Mode ..................... 234 Sweep Time ....................... 235 Ref Level ........................235 RF Att Mode .......................
  • Page 237 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Define frequency values for each range relative to the center frequency. Center the ref- erence range on the center frequency. The current "Tx Bandwidth" defines the mini- mum span of the reference range (see "...
  • Page 238 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Sweep Time Sets the sweep time value for the range. For details on the sweep time, see Chapter 7.5.1.7, "How Long the Data is Measured: Sweep Time ", on page 444 Remote command: on page 864 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME...
  • Page 239 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Limit Check <n> Sets the type of limit check for the n-th power class in the range. Up to four limits are possible. For details on limit checks, see Chapter 6.6.4.2, "Limit Lines in SEM Measurements", on page 224.
  • Page 240 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<range>:LIMit<PClass>:RELative:STOP: on page 861 FUNCtion [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<range>:LIMit<PClass>:RELative:STARt: on page 859 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<range>:LIMit<PClass>:RELative:STOP: on page 861 Multi-Limit Calc <n> Defines the function used to calculate the limit line for the n-th power class for overlap- ping ranges in Multi-SEM measurements.
  • Page 241 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement ● Deleting ranges: the symmetrical range on the other side of the reference range is also deleted ● Editing range settings: the settings in the symmetrical range are adapted accord- ingly Note: If "Fast SEM"...
  • Page 242 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement For measurements with only one sub block, this setting corresponds to the global set- ting in the "Frequency" settings (see Center Frequency Remote command: on page 850 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SCENter Standard / MSR Settings Defines the use of a standard settings file or a multi-standard radio configuration for a particular sub block.
  • Page 243 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Power Reference Type ....................240 Channel Power Settings .....................240 └ Tx Bandwidth ....................240 └ RRC Filter State ...................240 └ Alpha: ......................240 Power Reference Type Defines how the reference power is calculated. "Channel Power"...
  • Page 244 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Used Power Classes: ....................241 PMin / PMax .......................241 Sweep List ........................242 Adding or Removing a Power Class ................242 Used Power Classes: Defines which power classes are considered for the SEM measurement. Limits can be defined only for used power classes.
  • Page 245 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Remote command: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<PClass>:MINimum on page 871 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<PClass>:MAXimum on page 871 Sweep List Switches to the "Sweep List" tab of the "Spectrum Emission Mask" dialog box and focuses the "Limit Check" setting for the corresponding power class (1-4) in the refer- ence range (see "...
  • Page 246 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Band Category ......................243 Base Station Class .....................243 Base Station Maximum Output Power ............... 244 Bands ......................... 244 Base Station RF Bandwidth ..................244 Carrier Adjacent to RF Bandwidth Edge ..............
  • Page 247 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Remote command: on page 874 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:CLASs Base Station Maximum Output Power Defines the maximum output power of the base station. Possible values are from 0 dBm to 100 dBm in 1 dB steps. This setting is only available for base stations with a medium range Base Station Class...
  • Page 248 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement This setting is required to calculate the SEM limits according to standard 3GPP 37.141 V12.2.0. Remote command: on page 875 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:GSM:CARRier Apply to SEM Configures the SEM sweep list according to the specified MSR settings. Remote command: on page 872 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:APPLy...
  • Page 249 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files............246 File Name ........................246 Load Standard ......................246 Save Standard ......................246 Delete Standard ......................247 Restore Standard Files ....................247 Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files Select the storage location of the file on the instrument or an external drive.
  • Page 250 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Delete Standard Deletes the selected standard. Standards predefined by Rohde & Schwarz can also be deleted. A confirmation query is displayed to avoid unintentional deletion of the stan- dard. Note: Restoring predefined standard files. The standards predefined by Rohde & Schwarz available at the time of delivery can be restored using the "Restore Standard Files"...

  • Page 251: How To Perform A Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement List Evaluation State (Result Summary)..............248 Show Peaks ....................... 248 Margin ........................248 Saving the Result Summary (Evaluation List) to a File ..........248 List Evaluation State (Result Summary) Activates or deactivates the Result Summary. Remote command: on page 878 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:AUTO...
  • Page 252 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement The following tasks are described: ● "To select an SEM measurement" on page 249 ● "To perform an SEM measurement according to a standard" on page 249 ● "To configure a user-defined SEM measurement" on page 249 ●...
  • Page 253 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Select the power classes to be used for the current measurement: ● a specific class ● all classes, to have the required class selected automatically according to the input level measured in the reference range 4.
  • Page 254 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 2. Select the band category that determines the digital standards used in the mea- surement setup (see " Band Category " on page 243). 3. Define the bandwidth that contains all relevant carrier signals to be measured. 4.
  • Page 255 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 6.6.6.1 How to Manage SEM Settings Files SEM measurement settings can be saved to an XML file which can then be exported to another application or loaded on the R&S FSW again later. Some predefined XML files are provided that contain ranges and parameters according to the selected standard.

  • Page 256: Measurement Example: Multi-Sem Measurement

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 6.6.6.2 How to Save SEM Result Files The Result Summary from an SEM measurement can be saved to a file, which can be exported to another application for further analysis, for example. For details on the file format of the SEM export file, see Chapter 6.6.8.2, "ASCII File Export Format (Spectrum Emission...
  • Page 257 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S FSW SMW): Device Standard Center frequency Level Test model SigGen 1 3GPP/FDD 900 MHz 0 dBm 1-16 SigGen 2 EUTRA/LTE 906.5 MHz 0 dBm 1_1_5MHz Setting up the measurement 1.

  • Page 258: Reference: Sem File Descriptions

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Figure 6-42: Multi-SEM measurement: results of the measurement for each sub block 6.6.8 Reference: SEM File Descriptions This reference provides details on the format of the SEM settings and result files. ●...
  • Page 259 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Be sure to follow the structure exactly as shown below or else the R&S FSW is not able to interpret the XML file and error messages are shown on the screen. It is recom- mended that you make a copy of an existing file and edit the copy of the file.
  • Page 260 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement The following tables show the child nodes and attributes of each element and show if a child node or attribute is mandatory for the R&S FSW to interpret the file or not. The hierarchy of the XML cannot be seen in the tables.
  • Page 261 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement <Bandwith>"Bandwidth"</Bandwidth> </WeightingFilter> <FrequencyRange> <Start>"RangeStart"</Start> <Stop>"RangeStop"</Stop> </FrequencyRange> <Limit> <Start Unit="Unit" Value="Value"/> <Stop Unit="Unit" Value="Value"/> </Limit> <Limit> <Start Unit="Unit" Value="Value"/> <Stop Unit="Unit" Value="Value"/> </Limit> <RBW Bandwidth="Bandwidth" Type="FilterType"/> <VBW Bandwidth="Bandwidth"/> <Detector>"Detector"</Detector> <Sweep Mode="SweepMode" Time="SweepTime"/> <Amplitude>...
  • Page 262 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Table 6-15: Attributes and child nodes of the PowerClass element Child Node Attribute Value Parameter description Mand. StartPower Value <power in dBm> The start power must be equal to the stop power of the previ- ous power class.
  • Page 263 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Child node Attribute Value Parameter description Mand. Limit dBm/Hz | dBm | A Range must contain dBc | dBr | dB exactly two limit nodes; one of the limit nodes has to have a relative unit (e.g.
  • Page 264 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 6.6.8.2 ASCII File Export Format (Spectrum Emission Mask) When trace data from an SEM measurement is exported, the data is stored in ASCII format as described below. The first part of the file lists information about the signal analyzer and the general setup.

  • Page 265: Spurious Emissions Measurement

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement File contents Explanation PeaksPerRange;1; Max. number of peaks per range to be detected Values;2; Number of detected peaks File data section 0;-12750000;-2515000;30000;13242367500;-43.844 Measured peak values: 722747802734;-0.33028793334960938;49.6697120 <range number>; 66650391;FAIL; <start frequency>; 2;2515000;12750000;30000;13257632500;-43.8447 <stop frequency>;...

  • Page 266: Spurious Emissions Measurement Results

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement 6.7.2 Spurious Emissions Measurement Results The measured signal, including any spurious emissions, and optionally the detected peaks are displayed in the Spurious Emissions measurement diagram. If defined, the limit lines and the limit check results are also indicated. In addition to the graphical results, a result table can be displayed to evaluate the measured powers and limit check results (see also Chapter 6.7.3.2, "Limit Lines in Spurious...

  • Page 267: Spurious Emissions Basics

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement ● Display a certain number of peaks per range ● Display only peaks that exceed a threshold ( "Margin" ) ● Display detected peaks as blue squares in the diagram, as well as in the peak list Furthermore, you can save the evaluation list to a file.
  • Page 268 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement Defining ranges by remote control In Spurious Emissions measurements, there are no remote commands to insert new ranges between existing ranges directly. However, you can delete or redefine the exist- ing ranges to create the required order. A remote command example for defining parameters and ranges in Spurious Emis- sions measurements is described in Chapter 13.5.8.7, "Programming Example: Spuri-...

  • Page 269: Spurious Emissions Measurement Configuration

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement The limit check is considered to be "' failed!" if any signal level outside the absolute lim- its is measured. If the limit check is activated, the limit line values for each range are displayed in the evaluation list.

  • Page 270: Range Start / Range Stop

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement Range Start / Range Stop ..................267 Filter Type ........................268 ...........................268 ........................... 268 Sweep Time Mode ..................... 268 Sweep Time ....................... 268 Detector ........................268 Reference Level ......................268 RF Attenuation Mode ....................

  • Page 271: Filter Type

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement Filter Type Sets the filter type for this range. For details on filter types, see Chapter 7.5.1.6, "Which Data May Pass: Filter Types", on page 443. Remote command: on page 886 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:FILTer:TYPE Sets the RBW value for this range.

  • Page 272: Rf Attenuation Mode

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement For details on the reference level, see Chapter 7.4.1.1, "Reference Level", on page 429. Remote command: on page 890 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:RLEVel RF Attenuation Mode Activates or deactivates the auto mode for RF attenuation. For details on attenuation, see Chapter 7.4.1.2, "RF Attenuation",...
  • Page 273 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement For details on transducers, see Chapter 11.3.1, "Basics on Transducer Factors", on page 649. Remote command: on page 891 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:TRANsducer Limit Check Activates or deactivates the limit check for all ranges. For details on limit checks, see Chapter 6.7.3.2, "Limit Lines in Spurious Measure- ments", on page 265.
  • Page 274 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement List Evaluation State ....................271 Show Peaks ....................... 271 Margin ........................271 Details ........................271 Peaks per Range ....................... 272 Save Evaluation List ....................272 List Evaluation State Activates or deactivates the list evaluation. Remote command: on page 878 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:AUTO...

  • Page 275: How To Perform A Spurious Emissions Measurement

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement Includes all detected peaks (up to a maximum defined by "Peaks per Range" ). Includes only one peak per range. Remote command: on page 892 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:DETails Peaks per Range Defines the maximum number of peaks per range that are stored in the list. Once the selected number of peaks has been reached, the peak search is stopped in the current range and continued in the next range.

  • Page 276: Reference: Ascii Export File Format (Spurious)

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement a) Activate the limit check by setting "Limit Check" to "ABSOLUTE" . The limit check is always activated or deactivated for all ranges simultaneously. b) Define the limit line's start and stop values for each range of the signal. If a sig- nal level higher than the defined limit is measured, the limit check fails, which may indicate a spurious emission.
  • Page 277 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement The header data is made up of three columns, separated by ';', with the syntax: Parameter name; numeric value; basic unit File contents Explanation File header Type;FSW-26; Model Version;1.00; Firmware version Date;31.Mar 11; Storage date of data set Mode;ANALYZER;...

  • Page 278: Statistical Measurements (Apd, Ccdf)

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) File contents Explanation File data section 0;9000;150000;1000;79500;-25.006643295288086;- Measured peak values: 12.006643295288086;PASS; <range number>; 0;9000;150000;1000;101022.11126961483;-47.075 <start frequency>; 111389160156;-34.075111389160156;PASS; <stop frequency>; 0;9000;150000;1000;58380.171184022824;-47.079 <resolution bandwidth of range>; 341888427734;-34.079341888427734;PASS; <frequency of peak>; <absolute power in dBm of peak>; <distance to the limit line in dB>;...

  • Page 279: Typical Applications

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) Statistic measurements on pulsed signals can be performed using a gated trigger. For details see Chapter 6.8.4, "APD and CCDF Basics - Gated Triggering", on page 279. 6.8.2 Typical Applications Digital modulated signals are similar to white noise within the transmit channel, but are different in their amplitude distribution.
  • Page 280 ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) In addition to the histogram, a result table is displayed containing the following informa- tion: ● Number of samples used for calculation ● For each displayed trace: – Mean amplitude – Peak amplitude –...
  • Page 281 ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) A red line indicates the ideal Gaussian distribution for the measured amplitude range. The displayed amplitude range is indicated as "Mean Pwr" + "<x dB>" In addition to the histogram, a result table is displayed containing the following informa- tion: ●...

  • Page 282: Apd And Ccdf Basics - Gated Triggering

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) Percent marker As all markers, the percent marker can be moved simply by selecting it with a finger or mouse cursor and dragging it to the desired position. Diagram Scaling The scaling for both the x-axis and y-axis of the statistics diagram can be configured. In particular, you can restrict the range of amplitudes to be evaluated and the probabili- ties to be displayed.

  • Page 283: Apd And Ccdf Configuration

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) 6.8.5 APD and CCDF Configuration Configuration consists of the following settings: ● Basic Settings....................... 280 ● Gate Range Definition for APD and CCDF............282 ● Scaling for Statistics Diagrams................284 6.8.5.1 Basic Settings Access: "Overview"...

  • Page 284: Percent Marker (Ccdf Only)

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap- ter 13.5.9, "Analyzing Statistics (APD, CCDF)", on page 897. Both dialog boxes are identical except for the "Percent Marker" setting, which is only available for CCDF measurements.

  • Page 285: Gated Trigger

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) For statistics measurements with the R&S FSW, the number of samples to be mea- sured is defined instead of the sweep time. Since only statistically independent sam- ples contribute to statistics, the sweep or measurement time is calculated automatically and displayed in the channel bar ( "Meas Time"...
  • Page 286 ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) Up to three ranges can be defined for each of the six available traces. Comment ........................283 Period .........................283 Range <x> Use ......................283 Range <x> Start/Stop ....................283 Comment An optional comment can be defined for the gate range settings of each trace. Remote command: on page 899 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:COMMent...
  • Page 287 ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) Note: You can define the time values with a greater numerical resolution than is dis- played; the values are only rounded for display. Remote command: on page 899 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:STARt<range> on page 900 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:STOP<range>...
  • Page 288 ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) └ Y-Max / Y-Min ....................285 Default Settings ......................286 Adjust Settings ......................286 X-Axis Defines the scaling settings for signal level values. Ref Level ← X-Axis Defines the reference level for the signal levels in the currently active unit (dBm, dBµV, etc.).

  • Page 289: How To Perform An Apd Or Ccdf Measurement

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) Default Settings Resets the x- and y-axis scalings to their preset values. X-axis ref level: -10 dBm X-axis range APD: 100 dB X-axis range CCDF: 20 dB Y-axis upper limit: Y-axis lower limit: 1E-6 Remote command: on page 901...

  • Page 290: Examples

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) 3. Define the time period for which the input signal is to be analyzed, for example the duration of 3 signal pulses. 4. For each active trace, define up to three ranges within the time period to be mea- sured.
  • Page 291 ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) t3: Begin of useful part, to be used for statistics (after 40 µs) t4: End of useful part, to be used for statistics (after 578 µs) t5: End of burst (after 602 µs) The instrument has to be configured as follows: Trigger Offset t2 –...
  • Page 292 ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) Figure 6-44: Amplitude probability distribution of white noise 4. Now select the "CCDF" measurement function from the "Select Measurement" dia- log box. Figure 6-45: CCDF of white noise The CCDF trace indicates the probability that a level will exceed the mean power. The level above the mean power is plotted along the x-axis of the graph.

  • Page 293: Optimizing And Troubleshooting The Measurement

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Time Domain Power Measurement 6.8.8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement If the results do not meet your expectations, try the following methods to optimize the measurement: ● Make sure the defined bandwidth is wide enough for the signal bandwidth of the device under test to be fully analyzed (see "...

  • Page 294: Time Domain Power Basics - Range Definition Using Limit Lines

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Time Domain Power Measurement Mode Description Mean Mean value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof. The linear mean value of the equivalent voltages is calcula- ted. For example to measure the mean power during a GSM burst Std Dev The standard deviation of the measurement points from the mean value.

  • Page 295: Time Domain Power Configuration

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Time Domain Power Measurement In order to get stable measurement results for a limited evaluation range, usually a trig- ger is required. 6.9.4 Time Domain Power Configuration Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Time Domain Power" > "Time Dom Power Config"...

  • Page 296: How To Measure Powers In The Time Domain

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Time Domain Power Measurement Left Limit / Right Limit Defines a power level limit for line S1 (left) or S2 (right). Remote command: on page 1083 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT on page 1083 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt 6.9.5 How to Measure Powers in the Time Domain The step-by-step procedure to measure powers in the time domain is described here in detail.
  • Page 297 ® Measurements and Results R&S Time Domain Power Measurement Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW): Frequency: 1.8 GHz Level: -10 dBm Modulation: GSM/EDGE Procedure: 1. Preset the R&S FSW. 2. Set the center frequency to 1.8 GHz. 3. Set the RBW to 100 kHz. μ...

  • Page 298: Harmonic Distortion Measurement

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Harmonic Distortion Measurement 6.10 Harmonic Distortion Measurement The "Harmonic Distortion" measurement measures harmonics and their distortion, including the total harmonic distortion. ● About the Measurement..................295 ● Harmonic Distortion Basics................... 295 ● Harmonic Distortion Results..................298 ● Harmonic Distortion Configuration................
  • Page 299 ® Measurements and Results R&S Harmonic Distortion Measurement The THD is set in relation to the power of the fundamental frequency (= center fre- quency). Obtainable dynamic range When harmonics are being measured, the obtainable dynamic range depends on the second harmonic intercept of the signal analyzer.
  • Page 300 ® Measurements and Results R&S Harmonic Distortion Measurement The formula for the internally generated level P at the 2 harmonic in dBm is: = 2 * P – S.H.I. (2) The lower measurement limit for the harmonic is the noise floor of the signal analyzer. The harmonic of the measured DUT should –...

  • Page 301: Harmonic Distortion Results

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Harmonic Distortion Measurement CMT = n*SWT The required measurement time is indicated as "CMT" in the channel bar. 6.10.3 Harmonic Distortion Results As a result of the harmonics distortion measurement, the zero span sweeps of all detected harmonics are shown in the diagram, separated by red display lines.

  • Page 302: Harmonic Distortion Configuration

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Harmonic Distortion Measurement 6.10.4 Harmonic Distortion Configuration Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Harmonic Distortion" > "Harmonic Dis- tortion Config" The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap- ter 13.5.11, "Measuring the Harmonic Distortion", on page 917.

  • Page 303: How To Determine The Harmonic Distortion

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement Adjust Settings If harmonic measurement was performed in the frequency domain, a new peak search is started in the frequency range that was set before starting the harmonic measure- ment. The center frequency is set to this frequency and the reference level is adjusted accordingly.

  • Page 304: About The Toi Measurement

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement ● Configuration....................306 ● How to Determine the Third Order Intercept............307 ● Measurement Example – Measuring the R&S FSW's Intrinsic Intermodulation... 307 6.11.1 About the TOI Measurement If several signals are applied to a transmission two-port device with nonlinear charac- teristic, intermodulation products appear at its output at the sums and differences of the signals.
  • Page 305 ® Measurements and Results R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement Figure 6-47: Intermodulation products Ps1 and Ps2 The intermodulation product at f is generated by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful signal P and signal P Tthe intermodulation product at f is generated by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful signal P and signal P...
  • Page 306 ® Measurements and Results R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement Figure 6-48: Dependency of intermodulation products on level of useful signals The useful signals at the two-port output increase proportionally with the input level as long as the two-port is in the linear range. A level change of 1 dB at the input causes a level change of 1 dB at the output.
  • Page 307 ® Measurements and Results R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement Intermodulation-free dynamic range The "Intermodulation-free dynamic range", i.e. the level range in which no internal intermodulation products are generated if two-tone signals are measured, is deter- mined by the third order intercept point, the phase noise and the thermal noise of the signal analyzer.

  • Page 308: Toi Results

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement Figure 6-50: Intermodulation-free dynamic range as a function of level at the input mixer and of the selected resolution bandwidth (Useful signal offset = 10 to 100 kHz, DANL = -145 dBm/Hz, TOI = 15 dBm; typical val- ues at 2 GHz).

  • Page 309: Toi Configuration

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement Remote command The TOI can also be queried using the remote command CALCulate<n>: on page 922. MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult? 6.11.4 TOI Configuration Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Third Order Intercept" > "TOI Config" The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap- ter 13.5.12, "Measuring the Third Order Intercept...

  • Page 310: How To Determine The Third Order Intercept

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / Marker 4 Indicates the detected characteristic values as determined by the TOI measurement (see Chapter 6.11.3, "TOI Results", on page 305). The marker positions can be edited;...
  • Page 311 ® Measurements and Results R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement Test setup: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW): Device Level Frequency Signal generator 1 -4 dBm 799.6 MHz Signal generator 2 -4 dBm 800.4 MHz Setting up the measurement 1. Preset the R&S FSW. 2.
  • Page 312 ® Measurements and Results R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement The third order intercept (TOI) is displayed in the marker information. 2. The level of a signal analyzer's intrinsic intermodulation products depends on the RF level of the useful signals at the input mixer. When the RF attenuation is added, the mixer level is reduced and the intermodulation distance is increased.

  • Page 313: Am Modulation Depth Measurement

    ® Measurements and Results R&S AM Modulation Depth Measurement 6.12 AM Modulation Depth Measurement This measurement determines the AM modulation depth of an AM-modulated carrier. ● About the Measurement..................310 ● AM Modulation Depth Results................310 ● AM Modulation Depth Configuration..............311 ●...

  • Page 314: Am Modulation Depth Configuration

    ® Measurements and Results R&S AM Modulation Depth Measurement Remote command: The AM modulation depth can also be queried using the remote command on page 924. CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult? 6.12.3 AM Modulation Depth Configuration Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "AM Modulation Depth" > "AM Mod Depth Config"...

  • Page 315: Optimizing And Troubleshooting The Measurement

    ® Measurements and Results R&S AM Modulation Depth Measurement Marker Description Maximum of the signal (= carrier level) Offset of next peak to the right of the carrier Offset of the next peak to the left of the carrier The marker positions can be edited; the modulation depth is then recalculated accord- ing to the new marker values.

  • Page 316: How To Determine The Am Modulation Depth

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement 6.12.5 How to Determine the AM Modulation Depth The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to determine the AM modula- tion depth. For remote operation, see Chapter 13.5.13.2, "Example: Measuring the AM Modulation Depth", on page 924.

  • Page 317: About The Emi Measurement

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement 6.13.1 About the EMI Measurement EMI measurements can be very time-consuming, especially if weighting detectors are required for the measurement. In addition, EMC testing often requires various proce- dures to locate local EMI maxima. Such procedures are, for example, movements of an absorbing clamp, variations in the height of the test antenna or the rotation of the DUT.
  • Page 318 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement Figure 6-51: EMI measurement results Initial peak search results - Marker Table As a result of the initial peak search, the active markers are set to the positive peaks of the measured signal. If Auto peak search and limit lines are active, the active markers are set to the peak delta values between the measured signal and the limit lines.

  • Page 319: Emi Measurement Basics

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement Label Description Δ Limit Delta between measured level and limit line (if active) The value is colored to indicate the following states: ● green: does not exceed limit ● yellow: within margin ●...
  • Page 320 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement For the Quasipeak, CISPR Average, or Average RMS detector, the bandwidth is fixed depending on the frequency. For more information see Chapter 6.13.3.2, "Detectors and Dwell Time", on page 317. 6.13.3.2 Detectors and Dwell Time The EMI measurement adds new detectors to those already available with the base unit.
  • Page 321 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement ● The time is determined by the lowest modulation frequency to be averaged RMS detector The RMS detector displays the root mean square (RMS) value over the specified dwell time. The integration time is the specified dwell time. The RMS detector is already available with the base unit.
  • Page 322 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement CISPR Average detector (CISPR filter only) The CISPR Average detector displays a weighted average signal level according to CISPR 16-1-1. The average value according to CISPR 16-1-1 is the maximum value detected while calculating the linear average value during the specified dwell time.
  • Page 323 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement The RMS Average detector is only available for the CISPR filter. The detector is used, for example, to measure broadband emissions and may replace the quasipeak detector in the future. The detector parameters depend on the measured frequency. The time lag of the simu- lated pointer instrument reflects the weighting factor of the signal depending on its form, modulation, etc.
  • Page 324 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement Example: Linear axis: With a linear axis, the distance between the sweep points is equal, e.g. 200 kHz. Logarithmic axis: With a logarithmic axis, the distance between sweep points is variable. In the spectrum from 10 Hz to 100 Hz, the distance is a few Hz.
  • Page 325 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement 6.13.3.5 Using Transducer Factors The R&S FSW EMI measurement provides functionality to include transducer factors in the test setup. Transducers are devices like antennas, probes or current probes that are connected to the R&S FSW to measure interferences or useful signals. The trans- ducer converts the measured value such as field strength, current or RFI voltage into a voltage across 50 Ω.
  • Page 326 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement Manual peak search If automatic peak search is off, you can set the markers to any frequency you need more information about manually. You can change the marker position with the rotary knob or the cursor keys, or position it to a particular frequency with the number keys.

  • Page 327: Emi Measurement Configuration

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement The results of the final measurement are shown in the Result Summary (see Chap- ter 6.13.2, "EMI Measurement Results", on page 314). Defining a Dwell Time for the Final Measurement EMC tests often require a specific dwell time for an EMI measurement. The dwell time defines how long the R&S FSW measures the signal at the frequencies of the marker positions.
  • Page 328 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement 6.13.4.1 EMI Marker Configuration Access: [MKR] > "Marker Config" The initial peak search for the R&S FSW EMI measurement is defined by the marker configuration. Selected Marker ......................325 Marker State .......................325 Marker Position X-value .....................
  • Page 329 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement Remote command: on page 1079 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1077 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] Reference Marker Defines a marker as the reference marker which is used to determine relative analysis results (delta marker values). If the reference marker is deactivated, the delta marker referring to it is also deactiva- ted.
  • Page 330 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement "PositivePeak" Determines the maximum signal level that was detected during the specified dwell time. "Average" Determines the average signal level of the samples that were collec- ted during the specified dwell time. "Quasi-Peak"...
  • Page 331 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement Remote command: on page 1079 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1077 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] 6.13.4.2 EMI Final Measurement Configuration The final EMI measurement can be performed with different settings than the initial peak search. These settings are described here. The detector to be used for the final EMI test can be defined differently for each fre- quency, thus the detector is configured in the EMI marker settings, see "...
  • Page 332 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement If the resolution bandwidth is defined manually, a green bullet is displayed next to the "RBW" display in the channel bar. For more information see Chapter 7.5.1.1, "Separating Signals by Selecting an Appro- priate Resolution Bandwidth", on page 439.
  • Page 333 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement Remote command: Filter type: on page 963 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE Filter bandwidth: on page 962 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] Res BW MIL Defines the measurement bandwidth for military EMC standards. For more information see Chapter 6.13.3.1, "Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types", on page 316.

  • Page 334: Emi Result Analysis

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement LISN Type ........................331 Phase ......................... 331 150 kHz Highpass ...................... 331 LISN Type Selects the network type and activates output to the network via the user port of the R&S FSW. The network type determines the supported phases (see Table 6-20).

  • Page 335: How To Perform Emi Measurements

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement The R&S FSW EMI measurement adds further predefined limit lines designed in com- pliance with several EMC standards. Limit line configuration is described in Chapter 8.4.2.2, "Limit Line Settings and Func- tions", on page 540.
  • Page 336 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement 10. Configure the EMI measurement markers. a) Select the "Marker Config" softkey and activate the number of markers or delta markers you want to analyze. b) For each active marker, select a detector to be used for the "Final Test" , i.e. the subsequent EMI measurement at the marker position.

  • Page 337: Measurement Example: Measuring Radio Frequency Interference

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement If activated, a peak search is performed. For each active marker, a final measure- ment is performed using the specified detector for the specified dwell time. If acti- vated, the signal is demodulated at the active marker positions. The specified traces to be checked are compared with the active limit lines.
  • Page 338 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement 6. To obtain an overview of exceptional values in the input signal during the initial measurement, activate the "Auto Peak Search" . 7. Select the measurement bandwidth. a) Select the "Res BW CISPR" softkey. A CISPR (6 dB) filter is configured.

  • Page 339: Optimizing And Troubleshooting Emi Measurements

    ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement 3. Press the [RUN SINGLE] key to start a new EMI measurement. If activated, a peak search is performed. For each active marker, a final measure- ment is performed using the specified detector for the specified dwell time. If activated, the signal is demodulated.

  • Page 340: Common Measurement Settings

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Configuration Overview 7 Common Measurement Settings Basic measurement settings that are common to many measurement tasks, regardless of the application or operating mode, are described here. If you are performing a spe- cific measurement task, using an operating mode other than Signal and Spectrum Ana- lyzer mode, or an application other than the Spectrum application, be sure to check the specific application or mode description for settings that may deviate from these com- mon settings.
  • Page 341 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Configuration Overview 1. "Select Measurement" Chapter 6, "Measurements and Results", on page 123 2. Input Chapter 7.2.2, "Input Source Settings", on page 347 3. Amplitude Chapter 7.4, "Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration", on page 428 4.

  • Page 342: Data Input And Output

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 7.2 Data Input and Output The R&S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output (such as video or trigger signals). ● Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output..........
  • Page 343 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Active probes When using active probes from the R&S RT family, consider the following: ● Active probes require operating power from the instrument and have a proprietary interface to the instrument. ●...
  • Page 344 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output A fixed impedance of 50 Ω is used for all probes to convert voltage values to power levels. Additional information An application note discussing differential measurements with spectrum analyzers is available from the Rohde & Schwarz website: 1EF84: Differential measurements with Spectrum Analyzers and Probes Common Mode Offset (for Differential Probes) ®...
  • Page 345 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Clipping effects due to incorrect common mode offset ® The R&S RT-ZD10/20/30 probe measures only differential input signals. Common mode signals are suppressed by the probe. Therefore, the common mode offset com- pensation is not directly visible in the result display.
  • Page 346 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 3. Connect the probe to the adapter. Probes are automatically detected when you plug them into the R&S FSW. The detected information on the probe is displayed in the "Probes" tab of the "Input" dialog box.
  • Page 347 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output ● CM-Mode: Common mode input voltage (V Mean voltage between the positive and negative input terminal vs. ground The R&S FSW supports all probe modes. The mode is configured in the Chap- ter 7.2.2.2, "Probe Settings",...
  • Page 348 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output other connected devices. Using the same trigger on several devices is useful to syn- chronize the transmitted and received signals within a measurement. For details on the connectors see the R&S FSW "Getting Started" manual. External trigger as input If the trigger signal for the R&S FSW is provided by an external device, the trigger sig- nal source must be connected to the R&S FSW and the trigger source must be defined...
  • Page 349 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output The video output is a signal of 1 V. It can be used, for example, to control demodula- ted audio frequencies. The IF output is a signal of the measured level at a specified frequency. The "2ND IF"...

  • Page 350: Input Source Settings

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output For instrument model R&S FSW85, the IF output can also be provided at the optional "IF OUT 2 GHz" output connector at a frequency of 2 GHz and with a bandwidth of 2 GHz.

  • Page 351: Radio Frequency Input

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output External mixers are not supported in MSRA/MSRT mode. ● Radio Frequency Input..................348 ● Probe Settings.......................351 7.2.2.1 Radio Frequency Input Access: "Overview" > "Input/Frontend" > "Input Source" > "Radio Frequency" RF Input Protection The RF input connector of the R&S FSW must be protected against signal levels that exceed the ranges specified in the data sheet.

  • Page 352: Radio Frequency State

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Radio Frequency State Activates input from the "RF Input" connector. Remote command: on page 1001 INPut<ip>:SELect Input Coupling The RF input of the R&S FSW can be coupled by alternating current (AC) or direct cur- rent (DC).

  • Page 353: High Pass Filter 1 To 3 Ghz

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output In spectrum analyzers, passive analog mixers are used for the first conversion of the input signal. In such mixers, the LO signal is coupled into the IF path due to its limited isolation.

  • Page 354: Probe Settings

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Preselector Adjust Activates or deactivates the preselector adjustment. This function is only available for instrument modelsR&S FSW43/50/67/85, for fre- quency sweeps in the Spectrum application. Generally, sweeps exceeding a certain span use different signal paths to measure the required spectrum.

  • Page 355: Name

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output For each possible probe connector (Baseband Input I, Baseband Input Q, RF), the detected type of probe, if any, is displayed. For more information on using probes with an R&S FSW, see Chapter 7.2.1.1, "Using Probes", on page 339.

  • Page 356: Type

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Remote command: on page 1017 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:ID:PARTnumber? Type Type of probe: ● Single-ended ● Differential ● Active Modular Remote command: on page 1022 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:TYPE? Mode Mode for multi-mode modular probes. Determines which voltage is measured. "DM-mode"...

  • Page 357: Power Sensors

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Microbutton Action Active Rohde & Schwarz probes (except for R&S RT-ZS10E) have a configurable microbutton on the probe head. By pressing this button, you can perform an action on the instrument directly from the probe. Select the action that you want to start from the probe: "Run Single"...
  • Page 358 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Result display The results of the power sensor measurements are displayed in the marker table. For each power sensor, a row is inserted. The sensor index is indicated in the "Type" col- umn.

  • Page 359: State

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output State ...........................356 Continuous Value Update ..................357 Select ......................... 357 Zeroing Power Sensor ....................357 Frequency Manual ..................... 357 Frequency Coupling ....................357 Unit/Scale ........................358 Meas Time/Average ....................358 Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas -> Ref ......

  • Page 360: Continuous Value Update

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Continuous Value Update If activated, the power sensor data is updated continuously during a sweep with a long sweep time, and even after a single sweep has completed. This function cannot be activated for individual sensors. If the power sensor is being used as a trigger (see "...

  • Page 361: Unit/Scale

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Remote command: on page 1038 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:FREQuency:LINK Unit/Scale Selects the unit with which the measured power is to be displayed. Available units are dBm, dB, W and %. If dB or % is selected, the display is relative to the reference value that is defined with either the "Meas ->...

  • Page 362: Average Count ( Number Of Readings )

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Average Count ( Number of Readings ) Defines the number of readings (averages) to be performed after a single sweep has been started. This setting is only available if manual averaging is selected ( Meas Time/Average setting).

  • Page 363: Trigger Holdoff

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Trigger Holdoff ← Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the minimum time (in seconds) that must pass between two trigger events. Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored. Remote command: on page 1042 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:HOLDoff...
  • Page 364 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output To have newly connected power sensors assigned to a tab automatically (default), select "Auto" . 5. Define the frequency of the signal whose power you want to measure. a) To define the frequency manually, select "Frequency Manual" and enter a fre- quency.

  • Page 365: Optional External Generator Control

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 4. Disconnect all signals sending input to the power sensor and press [ENTER] to continue. 5. Wait until zeroing is complete. A corresponding message is displayed. How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External (PSE) Trigger The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to configure a power sensor to be used as an external power sensor trigger.

  • Page 366: External Generator Connections

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output A measurement with a tracking generator is useful to measure any effects on the power level caused by the cables and connectors from the signal generator and the signal analyzer in advance. The known effects can then be removed from the mea- surement results in order to obtain accurate information on the DUT.
  • Page 367 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output R&S SMW rear panel BNC Trigger BNC Blank R&S FSW rear panel Figure 7-4: TTL connection for an R&S SMW generator The external generator can be used to calibrate the data source by performing either transmission or reflection measurements.

  • Page 368: Overview Of Supported Generators

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Figure 7-6: Test setup for reflection measurement Generated signal input In order to use the functions of the external generator, an appropriate generator must be connected and configured correctly. In particular, the generator output must be con- nected to the RF input of the R&S FSW.
  • Page 369 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Generator Model Driver file TTL sup- Generator type Model Driver file TTL sup- type port port SMA100 3 GHz SMA100A3 20 GHz SMR20B11 SMA100A 6 GHz SMA100A6 27 GHz SMR27 SMB100A 1 GHz SMB100A1 27 GHz...

  • Page 370: Generator Setup Files

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Generator Model Driver file TTL sup- Generator type Model Driver file TTL sup- type port port 3 GHz SMIQ03B 2 GHz SMY02 3 GHz SMIQ03E HP8254A 40 GHz HP8254A 4 GHz SMIQ04B HP8257D 70 GHz...

  • Page 371: Normalization

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output quencies to the signal generator (see also "Coupling the Frequencies" on page 370). The signal generator then sends a signal with the specified level at each frequency in the predefined list. The R&S FSW measures the signal and determines the level off- sets to the expected values.

  • Page 372: Reference Trace, Reference Line And Reference Level

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output right border of the reference dataset are extrapolated to the current start or stop fre- quency, i.e. the reference dataset is extended by constant values. Thus, the instrument settings can be changed in a wide area without giving up normali- zation.

  • Page 373: Coupling The Frequencies

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Reference line The reference line is defined by the Reference Value Reference Position in the "External Generator" > "Source Calibration" settings. It is similar to the Reference Level defined in the "Amplitude" settings. However, as opposed to the reference level, this reference line only affects the y-axis scaling in the diagram, it has no effect on the expected input power level or the hardware settings.
  • Page 374 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Where: = output frequency of the generator Generator = current frequency at the RF input of the R&S FSW Analyzer Numerator = multiplication factor for F Analyzer Denominator = division factor for F Analyzer = frequency offset for F , for example for frequency-converting measure-...

  • Page 375: Displayed Information And Errors

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Reverse sweep The frequency offset for automatic coupling can be used to sweep in the reverse direc- tion. To do so, define a negative offset in the external generator measurement configu- ration.
  • Page 376 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Label Description APX (approximation) Normalization on; Deviation from the reference setting occurs Aborted normalization or no calibration performed yet Error and status messages The following status and error messages may occur during external generator control. Message Description "Ext.
  • Page 377 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output external generator. To switch between different configurations, define multiple mea- surement channels. For more information on external generator control, see Chapter 7.2.4.2, "Basics on External Generator Control", on page 363. ● Interface Configuration Settings................374 ●...
  • Page 378 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output ● GPIB ● TCP/IP (not by all generators) For details on which signal generators support which interfaces, see the documenta- tion of the corresponding signal generator. Remote command: on page 1027 SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator:INTerface TTL Handshake If available for the specified generator type, this option activates TTL synchronization...
  • Page 379 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Level Min / Level Max For reference only: Lower and upper power limit for the generator. Measurement Settings Access: [INPUT/OUPUT] > "External Generator Config" > "Measurement Configura- tion" tab Source State ......................
  • Page 380 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Source Offset Constant level offset for the external generator. Values from -200 dB to +200 dB in 1 dB steps are allowed. The default setting is 0 dB. Offsets are indicated by the "LVL" label in the channel bar (see also "Displayed Information and Errors"...
  • Page 381 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output For more information on coupling frequencies and reverse sweeps, see "Coupling the Frequencies" on page 370. For more information on error messages and the channel bar, see "Displayed Information and Errors" on page 372.
  • Page 382 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Calibrate Transmission Starts a transmission type measurement to determine a reference trace. This trace is used to calculate the difference for the normalized values. For details, see "Calibration Mechanism" on page 367. Remote command: on page 1029 [SENSe:]CORRection:METHod...
  • Page 383 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Save as Trd Factor Uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor. The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix .trd under "C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\trd".
  • Page 384 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 7.2.4.4 How to Work With External Generator Control The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to work with the optional External Generator Control. For remote operation, see "Programming Example for External Generator Control" on page 1031.
  • Page 385 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output quency Start" and "Result Frequency Stop" values to make sure the required mea- surement span is covered. If necessary, change the frequency settings on the R&S FSW ([FREQ] key > "Frequency Config" softkey), or use a different generator type.
  • Page 386 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 2. After setting "Source Calibration Normalize": "On", select "Save as Trd Factor" to store the normalized reference trace as a transducer factor. 3. If necessary, switch to another measurement channel for a different R&S FSW application.
  • Page 387 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output ● "Calibrating the measurement setup" on page 384 ● "Measuring the effects of the DUT" on page 385 ● "Compensating the effects of additional attenuation after calibration" on page 387 Calibrating the measurement setup 1.
  • Page 388 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Figure 7-7: Measurement results from generator, analyzer and connecting cables 13. Select "Source Calibration Normalize": "On" to set the measurement results for the current setup to 0, thus eliminating all effects from the generator, the analyzer and the connecting cables from subsequent measurements with the band elimination filter.
  • Page 389 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 2. Connect the band elimination filter output to the [RF input] connector of the R&S FSW. Figure 7-9: Band elimination filter results 3. Shift the reference line from the top of the diagram to the middle of the diagram by changing the position of the reference point 0.0 dB to 50 %.
  • Page 390 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Compensating the effects of additional attenuation after calibration After calibration, an additional attenuator is inserted between the DUT and the R&S FSW. This may be necessary, for example, to protect the analyzer's input connec- tor.
  • Page 391 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Figure 7-12: Reference line with an offset of -3 dB and shifted to middle of diagram (50%) 3. After the reference trace has been shifted, you can zoom into the measured trace to determine the offsets to the reference line, which represent the effects of the band elimination filter in the measurement setup.

  • Page 392: Optional External Mixers

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 7.2.5 Optional External Mixers If the R&S FSW External Mixer option is installed, an external mixer can be connected to the R&S FSW to increase the available frequency range. In this case, the input to measure is not taken from the RF input connector, but from the [Ext Mixer] connec- tor(s).
  • Page 393 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output : Intermediate frequency (variable; defined internally depending on RBW and span) Thus, depending on the required frequency band, the appropriate order of harmonic must be selected. For commonly required frequency ranges, predefined bands with the appropriate harmonic order setting are provided.
  • Page 394 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Two-port mixer Three-port mixer In both cases, the nominal LO level is 15.5 dBm. Bias Current Single-diode mixers generally require a DC voltage which is applied via the LO line. This DC voltage is to be tuned to the minimum conversion loss versus frequency. Such a DC voltage can be set via the "BIAS"...
  • Page 395 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output use biasing it is not important to know the exact current flowing through the diode since the conversion loss must be set to a minimum with the frequency. Therefore, it makes no difference whether the setting is performed by an open-circuit voltage or by a short- circuit current.
  • Page 396 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output then performed on the selected table to ensure that it complies with the settings. In particular, the following is checked: ● The assigned band name ● The harmonic order ● The mixer type ●...
  • Page 397 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Example: For example, for the level measured at the frequency 50 GHz, 43 correction levels are defined: ● 21 for the frequencies 48.075 GHz, 49.125 GHz, 49.175 GHz, ..., 49.975 GHz ●...
  • Page 398 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Signal ID function Two sweeps are performed alternately. Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the upper side band (USB) of the LO (the test sweep), trace 2 shows the trace measured on the lower side band (LSB), i.e.
  • Page 399 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output played in any of the traces 1 to 3. Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this cal- culated trace. Test sweep and reference sweep traces Depending on which of the automatic signal identification functions are used, the traces are used to display either the test sweep (the upper side-band sweep) or the ref- erence sweep (lower side-band sweep).
  • Page 400 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Such mixer products cannot be identified by the Auto ID function. It is therefore recom- mended that you perform a visual comparison of the test sweep and reference sweep using the Signal ID function. Examining unwanted mixer products with small span With large spans in which non-modulated sine-wave signals are represented as single lines, unwanted mixer products are generally completely blanked out.
  • Page 401 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Figure 7-17: Different mixer products displayed at the same frequency in the test sweep and refer- ence sweep (large span) Example: The external mixer is set to use the 2nd order harmonic. The signal recorded in the test sweep is displayed by trace 1.
  • Page 402 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Figure 7-18: Unwanted mixer products displayed for small span 7.2.5.2 External Mixer Settings Access: [INPUT/OUTPUT] > "External Mixer Config" If installed, the optional external mixer can be configured from the Spectrum applica- tion.
  • Page 403 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output External Mixer ......................400 RF Start / RF Stop ......................400 Handover Freq ......................401 Band ...........................401 RF Overrange ......................401 Preset Band ....................... 401 Mixer Type ........................401 Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration)..............402 └...
  • Page 404 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Handover Freq If due to the LO frequency the conversion of the input signal is not possible using one harmonic, the band must be split. An adjacent, partially overlapping frequency range can be defined using different harmonics.
  • Page 405 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output For more information see "External Mixers and Large Bandwidth Extension Options" on page 393. LO and IF data use the same port "2 Port" "3 Port" LO and IF data use separate ports Remote command: on page 1010 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:PORTs...
  • Page 406 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output "Table" Defines the conversion loss via the table selected from the list. Pre- defined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can be imported to the R&S FSW. Alternatively, you can define your own conversion loss tables.
  • Page 407 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Remote command: on page 1003 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOPower Signal ID Activates or deactivates visual signal identification. Two sweeps are performed alter- nately. Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the upper side band (USB) of the LO (the test sweep).
  • Page 408 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Tip: The trace in the currently active result display (if applicable) is adapted to the set- tings immediately so you can check the results. To store the bias setting in the currently selected conversion loss table, select the Write to CVL table button.
  • Page 409 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output New Table ........................406 Edit Table ........................406 Delete Table ....................... 406 Import Table ....................... 406 New Table Opens the "Edit conversion loss table" dialog box to configure a new conversion loss table.
  • Page 410 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output File Name ........................407 Comment ........................408 Band ...........................408 Harmonic Order ......................408 Bias ..........................408 Mixer Name ........................408 Mixer S/N ........................408 Mixer Type ........................409 Position / Value ......................409 Insert Value ........................ 409 Delete Value .......................409 Shift x...
  • Page 411 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Remote command: on page 1014 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect Comment An optional comment that describes the conversion loss table. The comment is user- definable. Remote command: on page 1012 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent Band The waveguide or user-defined band to which the table applies. This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range.
  • Page 412 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Mixer Type Specifies whether the external mixer to which the table applies is a two-port or three- port type. This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range.
  • Page 413 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output ● "To connect a three-port mixer" on page 410 ● "To connect a two-port mixer" on page 411 ● "To activate and configure the external mixer" on page 411 ● "To define a new conversion loss table" on page 412 ●...
  • Page 414 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output To connect a two-port mixer 1. 1. Connect the LO OUT / IF IN output of the R&S FSW to the LO/IF port of the external mixer. The nominal LO level is 15.5 dBm. Because of the diplexer contained in the R&S FSW, the IF signal can be tapped from the line which is used to feed the LO signal to the mixer.
  • Page 415 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output To define a new conversion loss table 1. Select "INPUT > Input Source Config > External Mixer > Conversion Loss Table". 2. Select "New Table". 3. Define a file name and, optionally, a comment for the new table. 4.
  • Page 416 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output ● "To set up the measurement" on page 413 ● "To activate and configure the external mixer" on page 413 ● "To take into account the cable loss in the IF path" on page 414 To set up the measurement IF IN...
  • Page 417 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output ters. If the selected table is not valid for the selected band, an error message is dis- played. If no conversion loss table is available yet, create a new table first (as described in "To define a new conversion loss table"...
  • Page 418 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output To set up the measurement IF IN LO OUT/IF IN External Mixer INPUT Figure 7-20: 3-port external mixer test setup 1. Connect the [LO] port of the external mixer to the [LO OUT / IF IN] connector of the R&S FSW.

  • Page 419: Output Settings

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output c) From the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl directory, select the 100112_MAG_4_B5000_3G5.B5G file. d) Select [ENTER]. 3. Switch to the "Mixer Settings" tab. 4. Select the "Mixer Type": "3-port". 5. Select "Mixer Settings > Band" to define the required frequency range. 6.
  • Page 420 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Data Output.........................417 Noise Source Control....................418 Data Output Defines the type of signal available at one of the output connectors of the R&S FSW. For restrictions and additional information, see Chapter 7.2.1.3, "IF and Video Signal Output", on page 345.

  • Page 421: Trigger Input/Output Settings

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Noise Source Control The R&S FSW provides a connector ("NOISE SOURCE CONTROL") with a 28 V volt- age supply for an external noise source. By switching the supply voltage for an exter- nal noise source on or off in the firmware, you can activate or deactivate the device as required.
  • Page 422 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Defines the usage of the variable Trigger Input/Output connectors, where: "Trigger 2" : Trigger Input/Output connector on the front panel "Trigger 3" : Trigger 3 Input/Output connector on the rear panel (Trigger 1 is INPUT only.) "Input"...

  • Page 423: How To Output A Trigger Signal

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Remote command: on page 992 OUTPut:TRIGger<port>:PULSe:LENGth Send Trigger ← Output Type ← Trigger 2/3 Sends a user-defined trigger to the output connector immediately. Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting.

  • Page 424: Frequency And Span Configuration

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration 7.3 Frequency and Span Configuration The frequency and span settings define the scope of the signal and spectrum to be analyzed with the R&S FSW. ● Impact of the Frequency and Span Settings............
  • Page 425 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration For example, to analyze signal harmonics, you can define the step size to be equal to the center frequency. In this case, each stroke of the arrow key selects the center fre- quency of another harmonic.

  • Page 426: Frequency And Span Settings

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration Insufficient measurement points - Resolution filter bandwidth Resolution filter bandwidth covers Filter may miss a signal covers one measurement point several measurement points 7.3.2 Frequency and Span Settings Access: "Overview" > "Frequency" For more information see Chapter 7.3.4, "How To Define the Frequency Range",...
  • Page 427 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration Center Frequency ...................... 424 Span ...........................424 Start / Stop ......................... 425 Frequency Axis Scaling ....................425 Full Span ........................425 Zero Span ........................425 Last Span ........................425 Center Frequency Stepsize ..................426 Frequency Offset ......................426 Center Frequency...
  • Page 428 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration For more information see Chapter 7.3.1.1, "Defining the Scope of the Measurement - Frequency Range", on page 421. Remote command: on page 959 [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN Start / Stop Defines the start and stop frequencies. The following range of values is allowed: ≤...
  • Page 429 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed. When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in much smaller steps (1/10 the size as for the arrow keys).

  • Page 430: Keeping The Center Frequency Stable - Signal Tracking

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration 7.3.3 Keeping the Center Frequency Stable - Signal Tracking If the signal drifts on the display but you want to keep the center frequency on the sig- nal peak, the center frequency can be adjusted automatically using signal tracking. In this case, the signal trace is surveyed in a specified bandwidth around the expected center frequency.

  • Page 431: How To Define The Frequency Range

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration 7.3.4 How To Define the Frequency Range The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to configure the frequency and span settings. For details on individual functions and settings see Chapter 7.3.2, "Frequency and Span Settings", on page 423.

  • Page 432: Impact Of The Vertical Axis Settings

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration spectrum or for the measurement time (horizontal, x-axis). The settings for the vertical axis, regarding amplitude and scaling, are described here. ● Impact of the Vertical Axis Settings...............429 ● Amplitude Settings....................
  • Page 433 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration results. All displayed power level results are shifted by this value, and the scaling of the y-axis is changed accordingly. To determine the required offset, consider the external attenuation or gain applied to the input signal.

  • Page 434: Amplitude Settings

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration 10 dB step reduces the sensitivity by 10 dB, i.e. the displayed noise is increased by 10 dB. To measure a signal with an improved signal-to-noise ratio, decrease the RF attenuation.
  • Page 435 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration Reference Level ......................432 └ Shifting the Display ( Offset )................ 433 └ Unit .......................433 └ Setting the Reference Level Automatically ( Auto Level )......433 RF Attenuation ......................434 └ Attenuation Mode / Value ................434 Using Electronic Attenuation...
  • Page 436 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration Shifting the Display ( Offset ) ← Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset. This offset is added to the measured level. In some result displays, the scaling of the y-axis is changed accordingly. Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R&S FSW so the application shows correct power results.
  • Page 437 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration To determine the required reference level, a level measurement is performed on the R&S FSW. If necessary, you can optimize the reference level further. Decrease the attenuation level manually to the lowest possible value before an overload occurs, then decrease the reference level in the same way.
  • Page 438 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration The electronic attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps. If the electronic attenuation is on, the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 5 dB steps. Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value.

  • Page 439: Scaling The Y-Axis

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration When you connect the external preamplifier, the R&S FSW reads out the touchdown (.S2P) file from the EEPROM of the preamplifier. This file contains the s-parameters of the preamplifier. As soon as you connect the preamplifier to the R&S FSW, the pream- plifier is permanently on and ready to use.
  • Page 440 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration Range .........................437 Ref Level Position ...................... 437 Auto Scale Once ......................437 Scaling ........................438 Range Defines the displayed y-axis range in dB. The default value is 100 dB. Remote command: on page 976 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] Ref Level Position...

  • Page 441: How To Optimize The Amplitude Display

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration Remote command: on page 977 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO ONCE Scaling Defines the scaling method for the y-axis. For more information see Chapter 7.4.1.3, "Scaling", on page 431. "Logarithmic" Logarithmic scaling (only available for logarithmic units - dB..., and A, V, Watt) "Linear with Linear scaling in the unit of the measured signal...

  • Page 442: Bandwidth, Filter And Sweep Configuration

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration 7.5 Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration The basic bandwidth, filter and sweep settings that apply to most measurements are described here. These parameters define how the data is measured: how much data is collected internally and which filters are used.
  • Page 443 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration rated is determined by the resolution bandwidth. Selecting a resolution bandwidth that is too large may make it impossible to distinguish between spectral components, i.e. they are displayed as a single component. Smaller resolution bandwidths, however, increase the required "Sweep Time"...
  • Page 444 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration RMS/Average detector and VBW If an RMS or average detector is used, the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed. Thus, duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS or average detector no longer occurs.
  • Page 445 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration 7.5.1.5 How Data is Measured: the Sweep Type In a standard analog frequency sweep, the local oscillator of the analyzer sweeps the applied signal quasi analog from the start to the stop frequency to determine the fre- quency spectrum.
  • Page 446 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration FFT mode and external mixers (R&S FSW-B21) The partial span optimation modes "Dynamic" and "Auto" include automatic suppres- sion of unwanted mixing products. Thus, when using external mixers (R&S FSW-B21), use the "Speed"...
  • Page 447 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration 5-Pole filters 5-Pole filters are very broad and allow for a large bandwidth to pass. 7.5.1.7 How Long the Data is Measured: Sweep Time Each filter has a settling time that must be awaited in order to obtain correct results. Since the resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth define the filter, the smaller of the two determines the minimum "Sweep Time"...

  • Page 448: Bandwidth, Filter And Sweep Settings

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration 7.5.1.9 How Often Data is Measured: Sweep Mode How often the spectrum is swept depends on the sweep mode. Either a certain number of sweeps can be defined ("Sweep Count") which are performed in "Single Sweep" mode, or the sweep is repeated continuously ( "Continuous Sweep"...
  • Page 449 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration Figure 7-24: Sweep dialog box for spectrogram display ...........................447 ........................... 447 Sweep Time ....................... 447 Span/RBW ......................... 448 RBW/VBW ........................448 Filter Type ........................448 Default Coupling ......................449 Sweep/Average Count ....................449 Sweep Points......................
  • Page 450 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration Defines the resolution bandwidth. The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet. Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth. If "Auto" is selected, the resolution bandwidth is coupled to the selected span (for span >...
  • Page 451 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration "Auto" The "Sweep Time" is coupled to the span (not zero span), video bandwidth (VBW) and resolution bandwidth (RBW). If the span, reso- lution bandwidth or video bandwidth is changed, the "Sweep Time" is automatically adjusted.
  • Page 452 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration The following filter types are available: ● Normal (3dB) ● Channel ● ● 5-Pole (not available for sweep type "FFT" ) ● CISPR (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option ●...
  • Page 453 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration Sweep Points Defines the number of measured values to be collected during one sweep. For details see Chapter 7.5.1.8, "How Much Data is Measured: Sweep Points and Sweep Count", on page 444. All values from 101 to 100001 can be set.
  • Page 454 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration Note: EMI measurements For EMI measurements (using R&S FSW-K54), "Dynamic" mode is not supported. "Auto" mode always uses "Speed" optimization. Remote command: on page 966 [SENSe:]SWEep:OPTimize Sweep Type Defines the sweep type. "Sweep"...
  • Page 455 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration Continuous Sweep / Run Cont After triggering, starts the sweep and repeats it continuously until stopped. This is the default setting. While the measurement is running, the "Continuous Sweep" softkey and the [RUN CONT] key are highlighted.

  • Page 456: Reference: List Of Available Rrc And Channel Filters

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration Continue Frame ← Spectrogram Frames Determines whether the results of the previous sweeps are included in the analysis of the next sweeps for trace modes "Max Hold" , "Min Hold" , and "Average" . This function is available in single sweep mode only.
  • Page 457 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 1 kHz CFILter 1.5 kHz CFILter 2 kHz CFILter 2.4 kHz CFILter 2.7 kHz CFILter 3 kHz CFILter 3.4 kHz CFILter 4 kHz CFILter DAB, Satellite 4.5 kHz CFILter 5 kHz...

  • Page 458: Trigger And Gate Configuration

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 300 kHz CFILter 500 kHz CFILter J.83 (8-VSB DVB, USA); RF ID 14333 1 MHz CFILter CDMAone 1.228 MHz CFILter CDMAone 1.28 MHz, a=0.22 TD-SCDMA 1.5 MHz CFILter 2 MHz CFILter...

  • Page 459: Triggering

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration 7.6.1 Triggering 7.6.1.1 Triggered Measurements In a basic measurement with default settings, the sweep is started immediately. How- ever, sometimes you want the measurement to start only when a specific condition is fulfilled, for example a signal level is exceeded, or in certain time intervals.
  • Page 460 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Trigger Hysteresis Setting a hysteresis for the trigger helps avoid unwanted trigger events caused by noise, for example. The hysteresis is a threshold to the trigger level that the signal must fall below on a rising slope or rise above on a falling slope before another trigger event occurs.
  • Page 461 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration " Drop-Out Time " on page 464. Drop-out times for falling edge triggers If a trigger is set to a falling edge ( "Slope" = "Falling" , see " Slope " on page 465) the measurement is to start when the power level falls below a certain level.
  • Page 462 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration 7.6.1.2 Trigger Settings Access: "Overview" > "Trigger/Gate" External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT connectors on the R&S FSW are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box. For step-by-step instructions on configuring triggered measurements, see Chap- ter 7.6.1.4, "How to Configure a Triggered...
  • Page 463 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration └ IF Power .......................462 └ Baseband Power ..................462 └ RF Power ..................... 462 └ Power Sensor ....................463 └ Time ......................463 Trigger Level ......................463 Repetition Interval ...................... 464 Drop-Out Time ......................464 Trigger Offset ......................
  • Page 464 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Trigger Source Selects the trigger source. If a trigger source other than "Free Run" is set, "TRG" is dis- played in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated. For gated measurements, this setting also selects the gating source. For more information see "Trigger Source"...
  • Page 465 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration on page 983 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce SWE:EGAT:SOUR EXT for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce on page 989 Video ← Trigger Source Defines triggering by the video signal, i.e. the filtered and detected version of the input signal (the envelope of the IF signal), as displayed on the screen.
  • Page 466 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration The input signal must be in the frequency range between 500 MHz and 8 GHz. The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preampli- fication. For details on available trigger levels, see the instrument's data sheet. Note: If the input signal contains frequencies outside of this range (e.g.
  • Page 467 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Remote command: on page 981 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower on page 982 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IQPower on page 981 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal<port>] on page 982 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo on page 982 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:RFPower Repetition Interval Defines the repetition interval for a time trigger. The shortest interval is 2 ms. The repetition interval should be set to the exact pulse period, burst length, frame length or other repetitive signal characteristic.
  • Page 468 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Trigger Holdoff Defines the minimum time (in seconds) that must pass between two trigger events. Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored. For more information, see "Trigger Holdoff" on page 458.

  • Page 469: Gating

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration 2. Define the "Repetition Interval" : the time after which a new measurement is star- ted. To define an external trigger: 1. Connect an external device that will provide the trigger signal to one of the TRIG- GER INPUT / OUTPUT connectors on the R&S FSW (for details see the R&S FSW "Getting Started"...
  • Page 470 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration 7.6.2.1 Gated Measurements Like a gate provides an opening in a fence, a gated measurement lets data from the input signal pass in defined areas only. The gate controls exactly when data is included in the measurement results and when not.
  • Page 471 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Example: By using a gate in sweep mode and stopping the measurement while the gate signal is inactive, the spectrum for pulsed RF carriers can be displayed without the superposi- tion of frequency components generated during switching. Similarly, the spectrum can also be analyzed for an inactive carrier.
  • Page 472 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration To indicate that a gate is used for the sweep, "GAT" and the gate source is displayed in the channel bar. Continuous gating With common gating, a measurement is performed each time the trigger event occurs. However, when using an external trigger, the measurement time for a single gate is restricted by the repetition rate of the external trigger.
  • Page 473 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Restrictions for continuous gating While continuous gating reduces the number of required external trigger events, not every sweep constellation can be performed using just one external trigger event. Note the following restrictions: ●...
  • Page 474 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Gate settings define one or more extracts of the signal to be measured. Gating is not available for measurements on I/Q-based data. Gated Trigger ......................471 Gate Mode ......................... 471 Gate Delay .........................
  • Page 475 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration "Level" The trigger event for the gate to open is a particular power level. After the gate signal has been detected, the gate remains open until the signal disappears. Note: If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger, the R&S FSW ignores the holding time for frequency sweep, FFT sweep, zero span and I/Q mode measurements.
  • Page 476 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration For details see "Continuous gating" on page 469. Continuous Gate......................473 Gate Period Length..................... 473 Gate Period Count...................... 473 Continuous Gate Activates or deactivates continuous gating. This setting is only available if Gated Trigger is "On".
  • Page 477 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Triggered gated measurements are only available in applications based on frequency sweeps (not I/Q-data based), such as the Spectrum application. For more information see "Triggered gated measurements" on page 470. For more information see the R&S FSW User Manual. Gate Source Mode......................
  • Page 478 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Remote command: on page 988 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel[:EXTernal<port>] on page 988 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel:RFPower Polarity Defines whether the gate is opened when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it. For gated measurements in "Edge" mode, the slope defines whether the gate starts on a falling or rising edge.
  • Page 479 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration 2. In the "Gate Settings" of the "Trigger and Gate" dialog box, select "Gated Trigger": "On". 3. Define the gate settings as described in "To configure a common gated measure- ment" on page 475.

  • Page 480: Adjusting Settings Automatically

    ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Adjusting Settings Automatically 7.7 Adjusting Settings Automatically Access: [AUTO SET] Some settings can be adjusted by the R&S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings. In order to do so, a measurement is performed. The duration of this measurement can be defined automatically or manually.
  • Page 481 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Adjusting Settings Automatically Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically ( Auto Frequency ) The R&S FSW adjusts the center frequency automatically. The optimum center frequency is the frequency with the highest S/N ratio in the fre- quency span.
  • Page 482 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Adjusting Settings Automatically Remote command: on page 995 [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:HYSTeresis:UPPer Lower Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function, the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted. To avoid frequent adapta- tion due to small changes in the input signal, you can define a hysteresis.

  • Page 483: Common Analysis And Display Functions

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Result Display Configuration 8 Common Analysis and Display Functions Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" General methods and basic settings to display and analyze measurements, regardless of the operating mode, are described here. If you are performing a specific measure- ment task, using an operating mode other than Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode, or an application other than the Spectrum application, be sure to check the specific application or mode description for settings and functions that may deviate from these...
  • Page 484 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Result Display Configuration Diagram Displays a basic level vs. frequency or level vs. time diagram of the measured data to evaluate the results graphically. This is the default evaluation method. Which data is displayed in the diagram depends on the "Trace"...

  • Page 485: Laying Out The Result Display With The Smartgrid

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Result Display Configuration (See Chapter 8.3.3.1, "Marker Search Settings", on page 501). Tip: To navigate within long marker peak lists, simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen. Remote command: LAY:ADD? '1',RIGH, PEAK, see on page 946 LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]?
  • Page 486 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Result Display Configuration separate window in the channel tab. Up to 16 individual windows can be displayed per channel (i.e. per tab). To arrange the diagrams and tables on the screen, the Rohde & Schwarz SmartGrid function helps you find the target position simply and quickly.
  • Page 487 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Result Display Configuration Figure 8-1: Moving a window in SmartGrid mode The brown area indicates the possible "drop area" for the window, i.e. the area in which the window can be placed. A blue area indicates the (approximate) layout of the win- dow as it would be if the icon were dropped at the current position.
  • Page 488 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Result Display Configuration SmartGrid functions Once the evaluation icon has been dropped, icons in each window provide delete and move functions. The "Move" icon allows you to move the position of the window, possibly changing the size and position of the other displayed windows.
  • Page 489 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Result Display Configuration Remote command: on page 946 / on page 951 LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? LAYout:WINDow<n>:ADD? 8.1.2.4 How to Close a Result Window ► To close a window, activate SmartGrid mode and select the "Delete" icon for the window.

  • Page 490: Zoomed Displays

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Zoomed Displays 8.2 Zoomed Displays You can zoom into the diagram to visualize the measurement results in greater detail. Using the touchscreen or a mouse pointer you can easily define the area to be enlarged.
  • Page 491 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Zoomed Displays Figure 8-3: Single zoom Figure 8-4: Multiple zoom Using the zoom area to restrict a peak search The selected zoom area can be used to restrict the search range for a peak search, but only in single zoom mode (see "...

  • Page 492: Zoom Functions

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Zoomed Displays 8.2.2 Zoom Functions Access: "Zoom" icons in toolbar Single Zoom ....................... 489 Multi-Zoom ......................... 489 Restore Original Display .................... 489 Data shift ( Pan )..................... 490 Data Zoom ......................490 Deactivating Zoom (Selection Mode) ..............

  • Page 493: How To Zoom Into A Diagram

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Zoomed Displays Data shift ( Pan ) Shifts the data to be evaluated in the result display (analysis region or hop/chirp) and re-evaluates the new data. ALL result displays based on the same data (analysis region or hop/chirp) are updated.
  • Page 494 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Zoomed Displays To zoom into the diagram at one position Click on the "Single Zoom" icon in the toolbar. Zoom mode is activated. 2. Tap and drag your finger in the diagram to select the area to be enlarged. The selected area is indicated by a dotted rectangle.

  • Page 495: Marker Usage

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage To switch off zoom mode and return to selection mode, select the "Selection Mode" icon in the toolbar. To zoom into multiple positions in the diagram Click on the "Multi-Zoom" icon in the toolbar. Multiple zoom mode is activated.

  • Page 496: Basics On Markers

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Markers in Spectrogram Displays In the spectrogram result display, you can activate up to 16 markers or delta markers at the same time. Each marker can be assigned to a different frame. Therefore, in addition to the frequency you also define the frame number when activating a new marker.
  • Page 497 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage marker more precisely, change the step size to move from one sweep point to the next (General Marker Setting). ● You can also set an active marker to a new position by defining its x-position numerically.
  • Page 498 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage next marker to be activated is set to the frequency of the next lower level (next peak) as a delta marker; its value is indicated as an offset to marker 1. A marker can only be activated when at least one trace in the corresponding window is visible.

  • Page 499: Marker Settings

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Trace to which the marker is assigned Frame Spectrogram frame the marker is positioned in. Displayed only when the Spectro- gram is displayed. X-value X-value of the marker Y-value Y-value of the marker Function Activated marker or measurement function Function Result...
  • Page 500 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage with reference to the first marker. All markers are assigned to trace 1, but only the first marker is active. Selected Marker ......................497 Marker State .......................497 Marker Position X-value ..................... 497 Frame (Spectrogram only)..................
  • Page 501 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage "Delta" A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci- fied reference marker (marker 1 by default). Remote command: on page 1079 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1077 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] Reference Marker Defines a marker as the reference marker which is used to determine relative analysis results (delta marker values).
  • Page 502 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Remote command: on page 1079 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1077 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] All Marker Off Deactivates all markers in one step. Remote command: on page 1078 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF 8.3.2.2 General Marker Settings Some general marker settings allow you to influence the marker behavior for all mark- ers.
  • Page 503 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Marker Table Display ....................500 Marker Info ......................... 500 Marker Stepsize ......................500 Defining a Fixed Reference..................500 Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed. "On" Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram.

  • Page 504: Marker Search Settings And Positioning Functions

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage For "State" = "On" , a vertical and a horizontal red display line are displayed, marked as "FXD" . The normal marker 1 is activated and set to the peak value of the trace assigned to marker 1, and a delta marker to the next peak.
  • Page 505 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage For Spectrograms, special marker settings are available, see Chapter 8.3.3.2, "Marker Search Settings for Spectrograms", on page 504. Search Mode for Next Peak ..................502 Exclude LO .........................502 Peak Excursion ......................503 Auto Max Peak Search / Auto Min Peak Search ............503 Search Limits...
  • Page 506 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage "Off" No restriction to the search range. The frequency 0 Hz is included in the marker search functions. Remote command: on page 1082 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:LOEXclude Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it is identi- fied as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions.
  • Page 507 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Use Zoom Limits ← Search Limits If activated, the peak search is restricted to the active zoom area defined for a single zoom. Remote command: on page 1084 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:ZOOM[:STATe] Deactivating All Search Limits ← Search Limits Deactivates the search range limits.
  • Page 508 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage └ Search Limits ( Left / Right )................. 507 └ Search Threshold ..................507 └ Use Zoom Limits ..................507 └ Deactivating All Search Limits ..............507 Search Mode for Next Peak in X-Direction Selects the search mode for the next peak search within the currently selected frame.
  • Page 509 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage "X-Search" Searches only within the currently selected frame. "Y-Search" Searches within all frames but only at the current frequency position. "XY-Search" Searches in all frames at all positions. Remote command: Defined by the search function, see Chapter 13.8.3.6, "Marker Search (Spectro- grams)", on page 1094...
  • Page 510 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Remote command: on page 1085 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:AUTO on page 1087 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:AUTO Search Limits The search results can be restricted by limiting the search area or adding search con- ditions. Search Limits ( Left / Right ) ← Search Limits If activated, limit lines are defined and displayed for the search.
  • Page 511 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Peak Search Sets the selected marker/delta marker to the maximum of the trace. If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated. For spectrogram displays, define which frame the peak is to be searched in. Remote command: on page 1086 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]...

  • Page 512: Marker (Measurement) Functions

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Remote command: on page 955 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer Reference Level = Marker Level Sets the reference level to the selected marker level. Remote command: on page 970 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:REFerence 8.3.4 Marker (Measurement) Functions Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap- ter 13.8.3, "Working with...
  • Page 513 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage A normal marker determines the position of the point on the trace and indicates the sig- nal frequency at this position. The trace, however, contains only a limited number of points. Depending on the selected span, each trace point can contain many measure- ment values.
  • Page 514 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage When activated, the sweep stops at the reference marker until the signal counter has delivered a result. Remote command: on page 1120 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt on page 1121 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency? Resolution Defines the resolution with which the signal is analyzed around the reference marker 1. Remote command: on page 1121 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:RESolution...
  • Page 515 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Correction factors The R&S FSW uses the following correction factors to analyze the noise density from the marker level: ● Since the noise power is indicated with reference to 1 Hz bandwidth, the bandwidth correction value is deducted from the marker level.
  • Page 516 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Remote commands: "Example: Measuring Noise Density" on page 1128 on page 1110 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] on page 1110 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult? Marker State .......................513 Marker Type ....................... 513 Noise Measurement State ..................514 Switching All Noise Measurement Off ................
  • Page 517 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage "Delta" A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci- fied reference marker (marker 1 by default). Remote command: on page 1079 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1077 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] Noise Measurement State Activates or deactivates noise measurement for the marker in the diagram.
  • Page 518 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage reaches the border of the span, the delta marker value is adjusted to be within the span. In these cases, select a larger span. The result of the phase noise measurement is the difference in level between the refer- ence point and the noise power density.
  • Page 519 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Phase Noise Measurement State Activates or deactivates phase noise measurement for the reference point in the dia- gram. This function is only available for delta markers. If activated, the delta markers display the phase noise measured at defined offsets from the reference position.
  • Page 520 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage marker T2 to the right of the reference marker. The default setting for n is 3 dB, but it can be changed. If a positive offset is entered, the markers T1 and T2 are placed below the active refer- ence point.
  • Page 521 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Remote commands: on page 1119 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe on page 1118 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult? n dB down Marker State .....................518 n dB down Value......................518 n dB down Marker State Activates or deactivates the special n dB down marker function. Remote command: on page 1119 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe...
  • Page 522 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage You can move the position of the fixed reference marker graphically by dragging the display lines, or numerically by entering values for the marker position and level. Remote commands: "Example: Using a Fixed Reference Marker" on page 1127 on page 1105 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe]...
  • Page 523 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Relative band power markers The results for band power markers which are defined as delta markers and thus have a reference value can also be calculated as reference power values (in dB). For analog demodulation measurements, relative band power markers are not availa- ble.
  • Page 524 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage All markers can be defined as band power markers, each with a different span. When a band power marker is activated, if no marker is active yet, marker 1 is activated. Other- wise, the currently active marker is used as a band power marker (all other marker functions for this marker are deactivated).
  • Page 525 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Remote command: on page 1115 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] on page 1117 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] Span Defines the span (band) around the marker for which the power is measured. The span is indicated by lines in the diagram. Remote command: on page 1114 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN...
  • Page 526 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage audio output. Thus, a displayed signal can be identified acoustically with the help of the internal loudspeaker or with headphones. This function is not available for Spectrum Emission Mask measurements or measure- ments on I/Q-based data.
  • Page 527 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Continuous Demodulation If activated, the signal is demodulated continuously (not only at the marker position) and sent to the audio output. This allows you to monitor the frequency range acousti- cally (assuming the sweep time is long enough). For zero span and EMI measurements, demodulation is always active continuously.
  • Page 528 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage 8.3.4.8 Marker Peak List Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "Marker Peak List" Or: [MKR FUNC] > "Marker Peak List" A common measurement task is to determine peak values, i.e. maximum or minimum signal levels.
  • Page 529 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Figure 8-6: Trace example The following table lists the peaks as indicated by the marker numbers in the diagram above, as well as the minimum decrease in amplitude to either side of the peak: Marker # Min.
  • Page 530 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Using a peak as a fixed reference marker Some results are analyzed in relation to a peak value, for example a carrier frequency level. In this case, the maximum level can be determined by an initial peak search and then be used as a reference point for further measurement results.
  • Page 531 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Maximum Number of Peaks Defines the maximum number of peaks to be determined and displayed. Remote command: on page 1108 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:LIST:SIZE Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it is identi- fied as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions.

  • Page 532: How To Work With Markers

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage 8.3.5 How to Work With Markers The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate in detail how to work with markers. ● How to Analyze a Signal Point in Detail..............529 ● How to Use a Fixed Reference Marker..............
  • Page 533 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage ● In the "Marker" dialog box, in the "Reference Fixed" area of the "Marker Config" tab, set the "State" to "On" . A vertical and a horizontal red display line are displayed, marked as "FXD" . The normal marker 1 is activated and set to the peak value of the trace assigned to marker 1, and a delta marker to the next peak.
  • Page 534 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage 6. Define how long you want to hear the output signal when the marker value is reached by entering the duration in the "Marker Stop Time" field. Alternatively, the audio signal can be output continuously, regardless of the marker value;...

  • Page 535: Measurement Example: Measuring Harmonics Using Marker Functions

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage 8.3.6 Measurement Example: Measuring Harmonics Using Marker Func- tions This measurement example describes how to measure harmonics using the provided marker functions. Note that this task can be performed much simpler using the Har- monic Distortion measurement (see Chapter 6.10, "Harmonic Distortion Measure- ment",...

  • Page 536: Display And Limit Lines

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Figure 8-7: Fundamental wave and the frequency and level reference point 7. Make the step size for the center frequency correspond to the signal frequency: in the "Frequency" configuration dialog box, select "Center Frequency Stepsize" = "Marker"...

  • Page 537: Display Lines

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Display lines are only available in the Spectrum and (optional) Analog Demodulation applications. In the I/Q Analyzer application, lines are only available for measurements in the fre- quency domain. Access: "Overview"...
  • Page 538 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Vertical Line 1 / Vertical Line 2 ................... 535 Horizontal Line 1 / Horizontal Line 2 ................535 Vertical Line 1 / Vertical Line 2 Activates a vertical display line (V1 or V2) in the diagram at the specified point of the x- axis, depending on the scale of the axis.

  • Page 539: Limit Lines

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines 8.4.2 Limit Lines Limit lines allow you to check automatically whether the measured points are below or above specified values. ● Basics on Limit Lines.................... 536 ● Limit Line Settings and Functions.................
  • Page 540 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines the time range representation, negative times may also be entered. The allowed range is -1000 s to +1000 s. Figure 8-8: Example for an upper limit line Limits and Margins Limit lines define strict values that must not be exceeded by the measured signal.
  • Page 541 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Offsets and Shifting A configured limit line can easily be moved vertically or horizontally. Two different methods to do so are available: ● An offset moves the entire line in the diagram without editing the configured values or positions of the individual data points.
  • Page 542 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Figure 8-9: Margin violation for limit check Figure 8-10: Limit violation for limit check User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 36...
  • Page 543 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Storing and Recalling Limit Lines Limit lines can be stored with the configuration settings so they can be recalled for other measurements at a later time (seeChapter 10.3, "Storing and Recalling Instru- ment Settings and Measurement Data", on page 600).
  • Page 544 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines For the limit line overview, the R&S FSW searches for all stored limit lines with the file extension .LIN in the limits subfolder of the main installation folder. The overview allows you to determine which limit lines are available and can be used for the current measurement.
  • Page 545 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Compatibility Indicates whether the limit line definition is compatible with the current measurement settings. For more information on which conditions a limit line must fulfill to be compatible, see "Compatibility"...
  • Page 546 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Remote command: on page 1137 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:OFFSet Y-Offset Shifts a limit line that has relative values for the y-axis (levels or linear units such as volt) vertically. This setting does not have any effect on limit lines that are defined by absolute values for the y-axis.
  • Page 547 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Name ..........................544 Comment ........................544 Threshold ........................544 Margin ........................545 X-Axis .........................545 Y-Axis ......................... 545 Data Points .........................545 Insert Value ........................ 546 Delete Value .......................546 Shift x ......................... 546 Shift y .........................
  • Page 548 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Remote command: on page 1141 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:THReshold on page 1144 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:THReshold Margin Defines a margin for the limit line. The default setting is 0 dB (i.e. no margin). For details on margins see "Limits and Margins"...
  • Page 549 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Remote command: on page 1136 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol[:DATA] on page 1138 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer[:DATA] on page 1142 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer[:DATA] Insert Value Inserts a data point in the limit line above the selected one in the "Edit Limit Line" dia- log box.
  • Page 550 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines 8.4.2.3 How to Define Limit Lines Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Lines" > "Limit Lines" or: [LINES] > "Line Config" > "Limit Lines" Limit lines for spurious and SEM measurements Note that for spurious and SEM measurements, special limit lines can be defined for each frequency range, see Chapter 6.6.4.2, "Limit Lines in SEM...
  • Page 551 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines How to edit existing limit lines Existing limit line configurations can be edited. 1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the limit line. 2. Select the "Edit" button. 3.
  • Page 552 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines ● Absolute or relative limits ● Upper or lower limit line 5. Define the data points: minimum 2, maximum 200: a) Select "Insert Value" . b) Define the x-value ( "Position" ) and y-value ( "Value" ) of the first data point. c) Select "Insert Value"...
  • Page 553 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines How to export a limit line Limit line configurations can be stored to an ASCII file for evaluation in other programs or to be imported later for other measurements. 1.
  • Page 554 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines 8.4.2.4 Reference: Limit Line File Format Limit line data can be exported to a file in ASCII (CSV) format for further evaluation in other applications. Limit lines stored in the specified ASCII (CSV) format can also be imported to the R&S FSW for other measurements (see "How to import a limit line"...

  • Page 555: Trace Configuration

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration 8.5 Trace Configuration A trace is a collection of measured data points. The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed on the screen. ● Standard Traces....................552 ● Spectrograms......................564 ●...
  • Page 556 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration The detector activated for the specific trace is indicated in the corresponding trace information by an abbreviation. Table 8-3: Detector types Detector Abbrev. Description Positive Peak Determines the largest of all positive peak values of the levels measured at the individual frequencies which are displayed in one sample point Negative Peak Determines the smallest of all negative peak values of the levels measured at...
  • Page 557 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Measurement point n Meas. point n+1 video video Video signal signal Signal SAMPLE s1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 s1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 MAX PEAK AUTO PEAK MIN PEAK You can define the trace detector to be used for the individual traces manually, or the R&S FSW can select the appropriate detector automatically.
  • Page 558 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Analyzing Several Traces - Trace Mode If several sweep are performed one after the other, or continuous sweep are per- formed, the trace mode determines how the data for subsequent traces is processed. After each sweep, the trace mode determines whether: ●...
  • Page 559 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration If you change any parameters that affect the scaling of the diagram axes, the R&S FSW automatically adapts the trace data to the changed display range. This allows you to zoom into the diagram after the measurement to show details of the trace.
  • Page 560 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration After the selected number of sweeps, the average trace is saved in the trace mem- ory. Until this number of sweeps is reached, a preliminary average is displayed. When the averaging length defined by the "Sweep Count" is attained, averaging is continued in continuous sweep mode or for "Continue Single Sweep"...
  • Page 561 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Figure 8-13: Sample size included in trace smoothing Effects of smoothing on post-processing functions Note that in Spectrum mode, all functions performed after the sweep, such as limit checks, markers, or channel power measurements, are based on the smoothed trace data.
  • Page 562 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Trace 1 / Trace 2 / Trace 3 / Trace 4 / Trace 5 / Trace 6 ..........559 Trace Mode ........................ 559 Detector ........................560 Hold ..........................560 Smoothing ........................561 Average Mode ......................561 Average Count ......................
  • Page 563 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration "Min Hold" The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed. The R&S FSW saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one. The "Detector"...
  • Page 564 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Smoothing If enabled, the trace is smoothed by the specified value (between 1 % and 50 %). The smoothing value is defined as a percentage of the display width. The larger the smoothing value, the greater the smoothing effect.
  • Page 565 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Remote command: on page 1053 [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:COUNt Predefined Trace Settings - Quick Config Commonly required trace settings have been predefined and can be applied very quickly by selecting the appropriate button. Function Trace Settings Preset All Traces Trace 1:...
  • Page 566 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Remote command: on page 1055 TRACe<n>:COPY 8.5.1.3 How to Configure a Standard Trace Step-by-step instructions on configuring the trace settings are provided here. For details on individual functions and settings see Chapter 8.5.1.2, "Trace Settings", on page 558.

  • Page 567: Spectrograms

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration 3. Select the "Copy to Trace" button for the trace to which the settings are to be applied. The settings from the source trace are applied to the destination trace. The newly configured trace (if not set to "Blank"...
  • Page 568 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Result display The spectrogram result can consist of the following elements: Figure 8-14: Screen layout of the spectrogram result display 1 = Spectrum result display 2 = Spectrogram result display 3 = Marker list 4 = Marker 5 = Delta marker 6 = Color map...
  • Page 569 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration time frame or simply "frame". As with standard spectrum traces, several measured values are combined in one sweep point using the selected detector. (See "Mapping Samples to sweep Points with the Trace Detector" on page 552).
  • Page 570 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration If you combine the two settings, 20 sweeps will be performed for each single sweep measurement. The first 10 will be averaged to create the first frame, the next 10 will be averaged to create the second frame.
  • Page 571 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration In the spectrogram result display, you can activate up to 16 markers or delta markers at the same time. Each marker can be assigned to a different frame. Therefore, in addition to the frequency you also define the frame number when activating a new marker.
  • Page 572 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration ing to the size of the window. All other spectrogram settings are identical for 3-dimen- sional and 2-dimensional spectrograms. When the measurement is stopped or completed, the currently selected frame is indi- cated by a gray vertical plane.
  • Page 573 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration The color display is highly configurable to adapt the spectrograms to your needs. You can define: ● Which colors to use (Color scheme) ● Which value range to apply the color scheme to ●...
  • Page 574 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration the color palette then covers a large range of results, while the other end distributes several colors over a relatively small result range. You can use this feature to put the focus on a particular region in the diagram and to be able to detect small variations of the signal.
  • Page 575 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Example: In the color map based on the linear color curve, the range from -100 dBm to -60 dBm is covered by blue and a few shades of green only. The range from -60 dBm to -20 dBm is covered by red, yellow and a few shades of green.
  • Page 576 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration 8.5.2.2 Spectrogram Settings Access: [TRACE] > "Spectrogram Config" The individual settings available for spectrogram display are described here. For set- tings on color mapping, see "Color Map Settings" on page 576. Settings concerning the frames and how they are handled during a sweep are provided as additional sweep settings for spectrogram display.
  • Page 577 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration State..........................574 3D Spectrogram State....................574 Select Frame.......................574 History Depth ......................574 3-D Display Depth....................... 575 Time Stamp ........................ 575 Color Mapping ......................575 Continuous Sweep / Run Cont ...................575 Single Sweep / Run Single ..................575 Clear Spectrogram .....................
  • Page 578 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Remote command: on page 1058 CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:HDEPth 3-D Display Depth Defines the number of frames displayed in a 3-dimensional spectrogram. For details see "Three-Dimensional Spectrograms" on page 568. Time Stamp Activates and deactivates the timestamp. The timestamp shows the system time while the measurement is running.
  • Page 579 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration takes effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel, and only for a chan- nel-defined sequence. In this case, the Sequencer sweeps a channel in single sweep mode only once. Furthermore, the [RUN SINGLE] key controls the Sequencer, not individual sweeps.
  • Page 580 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration = Color map: shows the current color distribution = Preview pane: shows a preview of the spectrogram with any changes that you make to the color scheme = Color curve pane: graphical representation of all settings available to customize the color scheme 4/5 = Color range start and stop sliders: define the range of the color map or amplitudes for the spectrogram = Color curve slider: adjusts the focus of the color curve = Histogram: shows the distribution of measured values...
  • Page 581 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration 8.5.2.3 How to Display and Configure a Spectrogram Step-by-step instructions on how to display and configure a spectrogram are provided here. For details on individual functions and settings see Chapter 8.5.2.2, "Spectro- gram Settings", on page 573.
  • Page 582 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration To set a marker in the spectrogram 1. While a spectrogram is displayed, select the [MARKER] key. 2. Select a "Marker" softkey. 3. Enter the frequency or time (x-value) of the marker or delta marker. 4.
  • Page 583 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration To select a color scheme You can select which colors are assigned to the measured values. ► In the "Color Mapping" dialog box, select the option for the color scheme to be used.
  • Page 584 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Example: The color map starts at -110 dBm and ends at -10 dBm (that is: a range of 100 dB). In order to suppress the noise, you only want the color map to start at -90 dBm. Thus, you enter 10% in the "Start"...

  • Page 585: Trace Math

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration ● A negative value (-1 to <0) focuses the lower values ● 0 defines a linear distribution ● A positive value (>0 to 1) focuses the higher values 8.5.3 Trace Math Access: [TRACE] >...
  • Page 586 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration "T1-T2->T1" Subtracts trace 2 from trace 1. "T1-T3->T1" Subtracts trace 3 from trace 1 "T1-T4->T1" Subtracts trace 4 from trace 1 "T1-T5->T1" Subtracts trace 5 from trace 1 "T1-T6->T1" Subtracts trace 6 from trace 1 To switch off the trace math, use the Trace Math Off button.

  • Page 587: Importing And Exporting Measurement Results For Evaluation

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation Remote command: on page 1064 CALCulate<n>:MATH:MODE 8.6 Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation The R&S FSW provides various evaluation methods for the results of the performed measurements.
  • Page 588 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation Detector type and number of sweep points In particular, the detector type and the number of sweep points remain unchanged. If the detector type of the active trace requires two points per x-value ( "Auto Peak" ), but the file contains only one, each point is duplicated.

  • Page 589: Trace/Data Ex/Import

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation ● Only trace 1 is imported to the spectrogram. Any other traces may be imported to a Spectrum display, if available. However, they do not change the spectrogram dis- play, which always refers to trace 1.
  • Page 590 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation Alternatively, you can select one specific trace only for export (see Trace to Export The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen: window by window, trace by trace, and table row by table row.
  • Page 591 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation If the spectrogram display is selected when you perform this function, the entire histo- gram buffer with all frames is exported to a file. The data for a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded.

  • Page 592: How To Import Traces

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation Remote command: on page 1071 MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe on page 1180 MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPECtrogram File Type ← Export Trace to ASCII File Determines the format of the ASCII file to be imported or exported. Depending on the external program in which the data file was created or will be evalu- ated, a comma-separated list (CSV) or a plain data format (DAT) file may be required.

  • Page 593: How To Export Trace Data And Numerical Results

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation To import trace data 1. Press the [Trace] key. 2. Select "Trace Config" > "Trace / Data Export" / "Import" . 3. Select "Import All Traces" to import traces for all the currently active traces, or select a specific trace to be imported in "Import to Trace"...

  • Page 594: How To Export A Peak List

    ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation 8.6.5 How to Export a Peak List You can save the results of a marker peak list to an ASCII file. 1. Press the [MKR FUNCT] key. 2.
  • Page 595 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen: window by window, trace by trace, and table row by table row. Generally, the format of this ASCII file can be processed by spreadsheet calculation programs, e.g.
  • Page 596 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation File contents Description y-Axis;LOG; Scaling of y-axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG) x-Unit;Hz; Unit of x values: Hz with span > 0; s with span = 0; dBm/dB with statistics measurements y-Unit;dBm;...
  • Page 597 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation File contents Description x-Axis;LIN; Scaling of x-axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG) Start;10000;Hz Start/stop of the display range. Stop;100000;Hz Unit: Hz for span > 0, s for span = 0, dBm/dB for statistics mea- surements Ref Level;-30;dBm Reference level...

  • Page 598: Optimizing Measurements

    ® Optimizing Measurements R&S Improving Averaging Results 9 Optimizing Measurements 9.1 Minimizing the Measurement Duration If you want to minimize the measurement duration, try the following methods to opti- mize the measurement: ● Reduce the span of the measurement to the relevant parts of the signal only. ●...
  • Page 599 ® Optimizing Measurements R&S Improving Averaging Results Generally, a higher sweep time leads to more data to be averaged and thus stabilizes the results. In FFT mode, a higher sweep time means more FFTs are calculated and combined per bin. Thus, in the same capture time, the FFT mode with an RMS detector can provide bet- ter results than an averaged trace.

  • Page 600: Data Management

    ® Data Management R&S Restoring the Default Instrument Configuration (Preset) 10 Data Management The R&S FSW allows you to store and load instrument settings, as well as import and export measurement data for analysis later. Finally, you can store or print the measure- ment results displayed on the screen.

  • Page 601: Protecting Data Using The Secure User Mode

    ® Data Management R&S Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode To restore the default configuration for a single channel The default measurement settings can also be reset for an individual channel only, rather than resetting the entire instrument. ► In the "Overview" , select the "Preset Channel" button. The factory default settings are restored to the current channel.
  • Page 602 ® Data Management R&S Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode Limited storage space The volatile memory used to store data in secure user mode is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "Memory full" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.

  • Page 603: Storing And Recalling Instrument Settings And Measurement Data

    ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data Switching users when using the automatic login function In the "Start" menu, select the arrow next to the "Shut down" button and then "Log off". The "Login" dialog box is displayed, in which you can enter the different user account name and password.

  • Page 604: Quick Save/Quick Recall

    ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data Saving instrument settings in secure user mode Be sure to store instrument settings that you require beyond the current session before SecureUser Mode is enabled; see Chapter 4.1.7, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 42.
  • Page 605 ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data limit line or transducer files (see Chapter 10.3.2.1, "Stored Data Types", on page 604). During recall, save sets of type "Instrument" replace the settings of the entire instru- ment.

  • Page 606: Configurable Storage And Recall

    ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10 Selects one of the save sets to store the current settings in or to be recalled. At the time of storage, the "QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10" placeholder is replaced by a label indicating the storage date and time and the storage type.
  • Page 607 ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data 10.3.2.1 Stored Data Types The following types of data can be stored to and loaded from files via the "Save" dialog box on the R&S FSW: Table 10-1: Items that can be stored to files Item Description Current Settings...
  • Page 608 ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data Access: "Save" / "Open" icon in the toolbar > "Save" / "Recall" Both dialog boxes are very similar and closely related. Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files............605 File Name ........................606 Comment...
  • Page 609 ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data For details, see Chapter 4.1.7, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 42. For details, see "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode" in the "Data Manage- ment"...
  • Page 610 ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data For details, see Chapter 4.1.7, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 42. Remote command: on page 1164 MMEMory:STORe<n>:STATe on page 1165 MMEMory:STORe<n>:STATe:NEXT Recall in New Channel / Recall in Current Channel Restores the instrument settings as saved in the selected settings file.
  • Page 611 ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data Startup Recall ......................608 Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files............608 File Name ........................609 Comment ........................609 Startup Recall Activates or deactivates the startup recall function. If activated, the settings stored in the selected file are loaded each time the instrument is started or preset.

  • Page 612: How To Save And Load Instrument Settings

    ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
  • Page 613 ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data 4. To restore the settings, select the "Open" icon from the toolbar. 5. Select the save set in which the settings were stored ( "QuickSaveX" ). The selected settings are restored to the instrument or channel. To save configurable instrument settings 1.

  • Page 614: Import/Export Functions

    ® Data Management R&S Import/Export Functions 6. Select "Recall" . The settings and selected items from the saved measurement are restored and you can repeat the measurement with the same settings. Note that any changes made to the settings after storing the configuration file will be overwritten by the stored values when the configuration file is recalled.
  • Page 615 ® Data Management R&S Import/Export Functions These functions are only available if no measurement is running. In particular, if Continuous Sweep / Run Cont is active, the import/export functions are not available. Import ......................... 612 Export .........................612 └ Export Trace to ASCII File ................
  • Page 616 ® Data Management R&S Import/Export Functions If the spectrogram display is selected when you perform this function, the entire histo- gram buffer with all frames is exported to a file. The data for a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded. For large history buffers the export operation may take some time.
  • Page 617 ® Data Management R&S Import/Export Functions Remote command: on page 1071 MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe on page 1180 MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPECtrogram File Type ← Export Trace to ASCII File ← Export Determines the format of the ASCII file to be imported or exported. Depending on the external program in which the data file was created or will be evalu- ated, a comma-separated list (CSV) or a plain data format (DAT) file may be required.

  • Page 618: Creating Screenshots Of Current Measurement Results And Settings

    ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings 10.5 Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings To document the graphical results and the most important settings for the currently per- formed measurement, you can create a screenshot of the current display. Screenshots can either be printed or stored to a file.
  • Page 619 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings Print Screenshot ......................616 Print Multiple Windows ....................617 Comment ........................617 Print Logo ........................617 Print Page Count ......................617 Select Device 1/2 ....................... 617 Print Dialog .........................618 Print Date and Time ....................
  • Page 620 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings Remote command: HCOP:CONT HCOP Print Multiple Windows Includes only the selected windows in the printout. All currently active windows for the current channel (or "MultiView" ) are available for selection. How many windows are printed on a single page of the printout is user-definable (see "...
  • Page 621 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings Two different printout devices can be configured, for example one for printing and one for storage to a file. When you execute the "Print immediately" function, the selected printing device and its settings determine the behavior of the R&S FSW.
  • Page 622 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings Zoom In / Zoom Out ....................619 Fit Page ........................620 Zoom 1:1 ........................620 Page Up / Page Down ....................620 Print ..........................620 Zoom In / Zoom Out Zooms into (enlarges) or zooms out of (decreases) the preview display. Note that the zoom functions affect only the preview, not the printout itself.
  • Page 623 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings Fit Page Adapts the preview display zoom factor so that one complete page is visible as large as possible in the available display space. Note that the zoom functions affect only the preview, not the printout itself.
  • Page 624 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings Printer settings are (printing) device-specific. That means you can configure two differ- ent printing devices (for example, a printer and a file) and switch between configura- tions easily simply by selecting the appropriate device before printing. Select Device 1/2 .......................
  • Page 625 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings Destination Defines the medium to which the printout is output. "File" Stores the printout to a file in the selected format. The filename is queried at the time of storage, or a default name is used (see Sup- press File Name Dialog Multiple windows can only be printed to a file in PDF format.
  • Page 626 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings For further information, refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation. 10.5.1.4 Page Setup Access: "Print" > "Print Config" > "Page Setup" tab Page settings are (printing) device-specific. That means you can configure two differ- ent printing devices (for example, a printer and a file) and switch between configura- tions easily simply by selecting the appropriate device before printing.
  • Page 627 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings Select Device 1/2 Selects the printing device to be configured. Two different printout devices can be configured, for example one for printing and one for storage to a file. When you execute the "Print immediately" function, the selected printing device and its settings determine the behavior of the R&S FSW.

  • Page 628: How To Store Or Print Screenshots Of The Display

    ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings The settings provided here are identical to those in the "Print Colors" section of the "Display" > "Theme + Color" dialog box. " Print Colors " on page 644. See the R&S FSW User Manual.
  • Page 629 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings To start printing or storing results to a file ► If the R&S FSW has already been set up according to your current requirements, simply press the "Print immediate" icon at the far right end of the toolbar. The current measurement display is printed or stored to a file, as configured.
  • Page 630 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings 9. To print another screenshot using the same configuration any other time, simply press the "Print immediate" icon at the far right end of the toolbar. If you use different printing scenarios alternately, perform the following steps to print another screenshot: a) Select the "Printer"...

  • Page 631: Example For Storing Multiple Measurement Results To A Pdf File

    ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings 9. In the "Color" tab, define the colors to be used for the printout. a) By default, "Optimized Colors" are used to improve the visibility of the colors. The background is always printed in white and the grid in black.
  • Page 632 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings 3. Select the "Printer" tool in the toolbar. The "Print Settings" dialog box is displayed. 4. Select "Device 1" to configure the settings for this printing device. 5. In the "Content" tab, select "Print Selected Windows" . 6.
  • Page 633 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings b) Use the zoom functions to make sure all relevant parts of the result display are visible. 18. Select "Print" to execute the print function. The selected data elements are stored to the file as configured. User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─...

  • Page 634: General Instrument Setup

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Alignment 11 General Instrument Setup Access: [SETUP] Some basic instrument settings can be configured independently of the selected oper- ating mode or application. Usually, you will configure most of these settings initially when you set up the instrument according to your personal preferences or require- ments and then only adapt individual settings to special circumstances when neces- sary.
  • Page 635 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Alignment During instrument start, the firmware checks whether the installed hardware is suppor- ted. If not, an error message is displayed ( "Wrong Firmware Version" ) and you are asked to update the firmware. Until the firmware version is updated, self-alignment fails.

  • Page 636: Alignment Settings

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Alignment ● If you notice that touching a specific point on the screen does not achieve the cor- rect response ● If the position of the instrument has been changed and you cannot look straight on the screen ●...
  • Page 637 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Alignment Self-alignment results in secure user mode Be sure to store self-alignment results before SecureUser Mode is enabled; see Chap- ter 4.1.7, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 42. In secure user mode, the results are not stored permanently. Thus, if the currently stored self-alignment results are not suitable, you must perform a self-alignment each time you switch on the R&S FSW.

  • Page 638: How To Perform A Self-Test

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Alignment Note: If you start a self-alignment remotely, then select the "Local" softkey while the alignment is still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the alignment is completed. In this case, you cannot abort a self-alignment man- ually.

  • Page 639: How To Align The Instrument

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Alignment Operating temperature Before performing this functional test, make sure that the instrument has reached its operating temperature (for details, refer to the data sheet). 1. Press the [SETUP] key. 2. Press the "Service" softkey. 3.

  • Page 640: Display Settings

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings A blinking cross appears in the lower left corner of the screen. 4. Touch and hold the blinking cross until it stops blinking. Repeat this action for the crosses in the other corners. 11.2 Display Settings 11.2.1 Display Settings Access: [Setup] >...
  • Page 641 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen The touchscreen function can be deactivated, e.g. when the instrument is being used for demonstration purposes and tapping the screen must not provoke an action. To reactivate the touchscreen, simply press the [Setup] key on the front panel. The "Display"...
  • Page 642 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings Toolbar ........................639 Status Bar ........................639 Softkey Bar .........................640 Channel Bar ....................... 640 Diagram Footer (Annotation) ..................640 Date and Time ......................640 Front Panel .........................640 Mini Front Panel ......................641 Toolbar The toolbar provides access to frequently used functions via icons at the top of the screen.
  • Page 643 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings Softkey Bar Softkeys are virtual keys provided by the software. Thus, more functions can be provi- ded than can be accessed directly via the function keys on the device. The functions provided by the softkeys are often also available via dialog boxes. How- ever, some functions are not accessible at all without the softkey bar.
  • Page 644 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings To activate or deactivate the front panel temporarily, press the [F6] key on the external keyboard (if available) or the remote computer. For more information, see Chapter 11.2.4, "How to Work with the Soft Front Panels", on page 648.
  • Page 645 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings Note: You can also activate the mini front panel using the key combination [ALT + m] (be aware of the keyboard language defined in the operating system!). That is useful when you are working from a remote PC and the front panel function is not active. Remote command: on page 1212 SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel[:STATe]...
  • Page 646 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings Theme ........................643 Screen Colors ......................643 Print Colors ........................ 644 Showing Print Colors on Display.................644 Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments............... 644 └ Selecting the Object..................645 └ Predefined Colors ..................645 └ Preview ......................645 Defining User-specific Colors..................645 Restoring the User Settings to Default...
  • Page 647 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings The default color schemes provide optimum visibility of all screen objects when regard- ing the screen from above or below. Default setting is "Default Colors 1" . If "User Defined Colors" is selected, a user-defined color set can be defined (see "Defining User-specific Colors"...
  • Page 648 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings Selecting the Object ← Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments Selects the object for which the color is to be defined. Colors can be defined for the following objects: ● Background ● Grid ● Individual traces ●...

  • Page 649: External Monitor Settings

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings The color palette allows you to select the color directly. The color settings allow you to define values for tint, saturation and brightness. Remote command: on page 1169 HCOPy:CMAP<item>:HSL Restoring the User Settings to Default Colors In addition to the predefined color settings, a user-defined setting can be configured.

  • Page 650: How To Configure The Colors For Display And Printing

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings Screen resolution and format The touchscreen of the R&S FSW is calibrated for a 16:10 format. If you connect a monitor or projector using a different format (e.g. 4:3), the calibration will not be correct and the screen will not react to your touch actions properly.

  • Page 651: How To Work With The Soft Front Panels

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings 3. In the "Screen Colors" area, do one of the following: ● Select a predefined set of colors for screen display. ● Select "User Defined Colors" to configure the color set yourself. 4. In the "Print Colors" area, do one of the following: ●...

  • Page 652: Transducers

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers To simulate the use of the rotary knob, use the additional keys displayed between the keypad and the arrow keys: Icon Function Turn left Enter Turn right Mini front panel The mini front panel provides only the keys on the touchscreen, to operate the R&S FSW via an external monitor or remote desktop.
  • Page 653 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers one value is taken into consideration. If the active transducer line is not defined for the entire sweep range, the missing values are replaced by zeroes. When a transducer is used, the trace is shifted by a calculated factor. However, an upward shift reduces the dynamic range for the displayed values.

  • Page 654: Transducer Settings

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers ● The frequencies for the data points must always be defined in ascending order. Otherwise the entry will not be accepted and an error message is displayed. ● The frequencies of the data points may exceed the valid frequency range of the R&S FSW since only the set frequency range is taken into account for measure- ments.
  • Page 655 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers Stored transducer settings When storing and recalling transducer settings, consider the information provided in "Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings" on page 601. ● Transducer Management..................652 ● Transducer Factors....................654 11.3.2.1 Transducer Management Access: [Setup] >...
  • Page 656 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers Create New Line ......................654 Edit Line ........................654 Copy Line ........................654 Delete Line ......................... 654 Name The name of the stored transducer line. Unit The unit in which the y-values of the data points of the transducer line are defined. The following units are available: ●...
  • Page 657 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers "Auto" Activates the automatic adjustment. The original dynamic range is restored by shifting the reference level by the maximum transducer factor. "Manual" Deactivates the automatic adjustment. Adjust the reference level via the "Amplitude" menu. Remote command: on page 1192 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ADJust:RLEVel[:STATe]...
  • Page 658 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers Name ..........................655 Comment ........................655 Unit ..........................655 X-Axis Scaling ......................656 Data Points .........................656 Insert Value ........................ 656 Delete Value .......................656 Shift x ......................... 656 Shift y ......................... 656 Save ........................... 656 Import ......................... 657 Export .........................657 Name...
  • Page 659 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers As soon as a transducer is activated, the unit of the transducer is automatically used for all the level settings and outputs. The unit cannot be changed in the amplitude set- tings unless dB is used. Remote command: on page 1194 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT...

  • Page 660: Reference: Transducer Factor File Format

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers Import Opens a file selection dialog box and loads the transducer factor from the selected file in .CSV format. Note that a valid import file must contain a minimum of required information for the R&S FSW.

  • Page 661: How To Configure The Transducer

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers File contents Description YAxisUnit;LEVEL_DB Unit of y values YAxisScaleMode;ABSOLUTE Scaling of y-axis (absolute or relative) NoOfPoints;5 Number of points the line is defined by Data section for individual data points 100000000;-50.000000 x- and y-values of each data point defining the line 500000000;-30.000000 1000000000;0.000000 1500000000;-30.000000...
  • Page 662 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers The trace is automatically recalculated for the next sweep after a transducer line is activated. 2. To deactivate a transducer line, deactivate the "Active" setting for it. After the next sweep, the originally measured values are displayed. How to edit existing transducer lines Existing transducer line configurations can be edited.
  • Page 663 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers How to configure a new transducer line 1. In the "Transducer" dialog box, select the "New" button. The "Edit Transducer" dialog box is displayed. The current line configuration is dis- played in the preview area of the dialog box. The preview is updated after each change to the configuration.

  • Page 664: Frequency Response Correction (R&S Fsw-K544)

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) 2. Select the "New" or "Edit" button. 3. Define the transducer factor as described in "How to configure a new transducer line" on page 660. 4. Select "Export" to save the configuration to a file. You are asked whether you would like to save the configuration internally on the R&S FSW first.

  • Page 665: Basics On Frequency Response Correction

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) 11.4.1 Basics on Frequency Response Correction Touchstone (.snp) files Touchstone (.snp) files contain data to characterize a measurement setup in respect to the gain and phase error over frequency. Such files are generated by network ana- lyzers, for example.
  • Page 666 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) Correction filters for I/Q data Filters can only be applied to I/Q data if they are defined for the complete analysis bandwidth. Therefore, if the combined frequency response filter does not cover the complete analysis span, it is invalid and cannot be used for the measurement.

  • Page 667: User-Defined Frequency Response Correction Settings

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) Since multiple correction settings can be active at the same time, the channel bar merely indicates that frequency response correction is being applied, but not which files are being used. To find out which correction files are being used for the active application, open the "User-Defined Frequency Response Correction"...
  • Page 668 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) Frequency response correction can be configured individually for all available input types (RF, baseband). The settings in the "User-defined Frequency Response Correc- tion" dialog box apply to the currently selected input type. State..........................666 Ext.
  • Page 669 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) State Activates or deactivates the general usage of user-defined frequency response correc- tion settings. If activated, the data in the active correction files is combined to create a filter. This filter is applied to the measurement results of subsequent sweeps. Remote command: on page 1207 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse:USER:STATe...
  • Page 670 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) Load Settings Loads a stored saveset for a user-defined frequency response correction scenario. Existing settings in the dialog box are overwritten. The settings apply to the currently selected channel or all channels, depending on the Apply to setting.
  • Page 671 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) To - From ← Touchstone File Information Touchstone files can be defined for a varying number of input and output ports. You must define the ports from the Touchstone file whose data is to be applied. Remote command: on page 1204 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:TO...
  • Page 672 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) An LED-like symbol indicates whether the file and frequency response in general is active (symbol "lights up") or not (symbol is dark). A green symbol represents a fre- quency response (.fres) file. Filename ←...
  • Page 673 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) Figure 11-1: Preview of selected user correction file Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse:USER:FLISt<fli>:DATA:FREQuency? on page 1198 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse:USER:FLISt<fli>:DATA:MAGNitude? on page 1198 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse:USER:FLISt<fli>:DATA:PHASe? on page 1198 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse:USER:SLISt<sli>:DATA: on page 1203 FREQuency<spi>? [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse:USER:SLISt<sli>:DATA: on page 1203 MAGNitude<spi>? [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse:USER:SLISt<sli>:DATA:PHASe<spi>? on page 1203...
  • Page 674 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) An LED-like symbol indicates whether each file is active and user correction in general is switched on (symbol "lights up") or not (symbol is dark). A purple symbol represents a Touchstone file. A green symbol represents a frequency response (.fres) file. The lower part shows the combined correction values for the valid frequency range.

  • Page 675: Reference Frequency Settings

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Reference Frequency Settings Figure 11-3: Spectrum Mode preview of user correction files Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse:USER:SPECtrum:DATA:FREQuency? on page 1207 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse:USER:SPECtrum:DATA:MAGNitude? on page 1207 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse:USER:SPECtrum:DATA:PHASe? on page 1207 11.5 Reference Frequency Settings Access: [Setup] > "Reference" User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 36...
  • Page 676 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Reference Frequency Settings Reference Frequency Input..................673 └ Behavior in case of missing external reference..........674 └ Tuning Range....................675 └ Frequency..................... 675 └ Loop Bandwidth.................... 675 Reference Frequency Output..................675 Resetting the Default Values..................676 Reference Frequency Input The R&S FSW can use the internal reference source or an external reference source as the frequency standard for all internal oscillators.
  • Page 677 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Reference Frequency Settings Table 11-2: Available Reference Frequency Input Source Frequency Tuning Loop Band- Description Range width Internal 10 MHz 1-100 Hz Internal reference signal or optional OCXO External Reference 10 MHz +/- 6 ppm 1-100 Hz External reference from REF INPUT 10 MHz...
  • Page 678 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Reference Frequency Settings Tuning Range ← Reference Frequency Input The tuning range is only available for the variable external reference frequency. It determines how far the frequency may deviate from the defined level in parts per mil- lion (10 "+/- 0.5 ppm"...

  • Page 679: System Configuration Settings

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S System Configuration Settings Resetting the Default Values The values for the "Tuning Range", "Frequency" and "Loop Bandwidth" are stored for each source of "Reference Frequency Input". When you switch the input source, the previously defined settings are restored. You can restore the default values for all input sources using the "Preset Channel"...

  • Page 680: Information On Versions And Options

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S System Configuration Settings Remote command: on page 1222 DIAGnostic:SERVice:HWINfo? 11.6.2 Information on Versions and Options Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" > "Versions + Options" Information on the firmware version and options installed on your instrument is provi- ded.

  • Page 681: System Messages

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S System Configuration Settings For details on options refer to the "Getting Started" manual, "Checking the Supplied Items". Remote commands: on page 1226 SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt on page 1222 DIAGnostic:SERVice:BIOSinfo? on page 1223 DIAGnostic:SERVice:VERSinfo? Open Source Acknowledgment: Open Displays a PDF file containing information on open source code used by the R&S FSW firmware.

  • Page 682: Firmware Updates

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S System Configuration Settings The messages are displayed in the order of their occurrence; the most recent mes- sages are placed at the top of the list. Messages that have occurred since you last vis- ited the system messages tab are marked with an asterisk '*'. If the number of error messages exceeds the capacity of the error buffer, "Message Buffer Overflow"...
  • Page 683 ® General Instrument Setup R&S System Configuration Settings The firmware on your R&S FSW may also need to be updated in order to enable addi- tional new features or if reasons for improvement come up. Ask your sales representa- tive or check the Rohde&Schwarz website for availability of firmware updates. A firm- ware update package includes at least a setup file and release notes.

  • Page 684: General Configuration Settings

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S System Configuration Settings If a measurement is running, stop it by pressing the highlighted [Run Cont] or [Run Single] key. 3. Select the [Setup] key. 4. Select the "System Config" softkey. 5. Select the "Firmware Update" tab. 6.
  • Page 685 ® General Instrument Setup R&S System Configuration Settings Preset Mode The default operating mode is Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode, however, the pre- setting can be changed. The defined operating mode is activated when you switch on the R&S FSW or press the [PRESET] key. The presettings can be defined in the "Config"...

  • Page 686: Service Functions

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Service Functions To save the new password, select "Save" . The password dialog for the next user is displayed, until you have been prompted to change the password all user accounts. If you cancel the dialog without changing the password, the password dialog for the next user is displayed, until you have been prompted to change the password all user accounts.

  • Page 687: Self-Test Settings And Results

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Service Functions Create R&S Support Information ................684 Save Device Footprint ....................684 Create R&S Support Information Creates a *.zip file with important support information. The *.zip file contains the sys- tem configuration information ( "Device Footprint" ), the current eeprom data and a screenshot of the screen display.

  • Page 688: Calibration Signal Display

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Service Functions If the R&S FSW fails you can perform a self-test of the instrument to identify any defec- tive modules. Once the self-test is started, all modules are checked consecutively and the test result is displayed.
  • Page 689 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Service Functions NONE .........................686 Calibration Frequency RF ..................686 └ Spectrum ......................686 └ Frequency ....................687 Calibration Frequency MW ..................687 Calibration Analog Baseband ..................687 └ Calibration Signal Type ................687 NONE Uses the current RF signal at the input, i.e. no calibration signal (default). Remote command: on page 1190 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect]...

  • Page 690: Service Functions

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Service Functions "Broadband" Used to calibrate the IF filter. Remote command: on page 1190 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:RF[:SPECtrum] Frequency ← Calibration Frequency RF Defines the frequency of the internal broadband calibration signal to be used for IF fil- ter calibration (max.
  • Page 691 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Service Functions Using service functions The service functions are not necessary for normal measurement operation. Incorrect use can affect correct operation and/or data integrity of the R&S FSW. Therefore, only user accounts with administrator rights can use service functions and many of the functions can only be used after entering a password.

  • Page 692: Hardware Diagnostics

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Service Functions Remote command: on page 1227 DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction Numeric Mode If activated, the service function is selected by its numeric code. Otherwise, the func- tion is selected by its textual name. Clear History Deletes the list of previously selected service functions. Password Most service functions require a special password as they may disrupt normal opera- tion of the R&S FSW.

  • Page 693: Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration Relays Cycle Counter ....................690 Relays Cycle Counter The hardware relays built into the R&S FSW may fail after a large number of switching cycles (see data sheet). The counter indicates how many switching cycles the individ- ual relays have performed since they were installed.

  • Page 694: General Parameter Coupling

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration 11.8.1 General Parameter Coupling Access: [SETUP] > "Parameter Coupling" > "General" The "General" tab of the coupling manager contains several parameters that you can couple across all (active) measurement channels - if the channel supports the corre- sponding parameter.
  • Page 695 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration "Start / Stop Frequency" Synchronizes the start and stop frequencies for measurements in the frequency domain. Note: The start and stop frequencies can automatically change when you change another frequency parameter (such as center frequency or span).

  • Page 696: User-Defined Parameter Coupling

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration "AC DC Coupling" Synchronizes the Input Coupling Remote command: on page 1230 INSTrument:COUPle:ACDC "Output Configuration" Synchronizes the Data Output. "Preselector" Synchronizes the YIG-Preselector (state, mode and filter characteris- tics). Remote command: on page 1233 INSTrument:COUPle:PRESel Selecting all or no coupling mechanisms...
  • Page 697 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration Any existing user-defined couplings are displayed in the dialog box. Index........................... 694 Edit coupling definition....................694 Parameter 1 / Parameter 2..................694 State..........................694 Direction........................695 Delete coupling definition.................... 695 Info..........................695 Delete All........................695 Add New User Coupling....................695...
  • Page 698 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration Remote command: on page 1241 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:STATe Direction Determines which parameter controls the other. "<-" Parameter 2 controls parameter 1. If parameter 2 is changed, param- eter 1 is adapted. If parameter 1 is changed, parameter 2 remains unchanged.
  • Page 699 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration Remote command: on page 1238 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NEW? Category ← Add New User Coupling Selects the category of parameters to be displayed in the Coupling Element 1 / Cou- pling Element 2 selection list. Channel 1 / Channel 2 ←...

  • Page 700: How To Synchronize Parameters

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration Remote command: on page 1237 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:ELEMent:LIST? Couple Selected Parameters ← Add New User Coupling Closes the dialog box and adds the new user-defined coupling definition to the list. 11.8.3 How to Synchronize Parameters Access: [SETUP] >...

  • Page 701: Example For A User-Defined Parameter Coupling

    ® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration b) Select the parameter to which the first parameter is coupled from the "Coupling Element 2" list. c) For Analog Demodulation channels and frequency markers only, select the individual windows (in the frequency domain) from the second Analog Demodu- lation channel to couple.
  • Page 702 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration Synchronizing all Spectrum channels The following example demonstrates how to synchronize the center frequency in all Spectrum application channels, while the VSA and Analog Demodulation applications remain independent. 1. Select the [SETUP] key. 2.
  • Page 703 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration Synchronizing markers in Analog Demodulation windows Now you have two Analog Demodulation channels. AnaDemod1 has an FM Spectrum and an FM Time Domain window. AnaDemod2 has an RF Spectrum and an RF Time Domain window.

  • Page 704: Network And Remote Operation

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics 12 Network and Remote Operation In addition to working with the R&S FSW interactively, located directly at the instru- ment, it is also possible to operate and control it from a remote PC. Various methods for remote control are supported: ●...
  • Page 705 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 12-1: Remote control interfaces and protocols Interface Remarks Protocols, VISA address string ● Local Area HiSLIP High-Speed LAN Instrument Protocol (IVI-6.1) A LAN connector is located on the TCPIP::host address::hislip0[::INSTR] Network rear panel of the instrument.
  • Page 706 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics VISA library Instrument access is usually achieved from high level programming platforms using VISA as an intermediate abstraction layer. VISA encapsulates the low level VXI, GPIB, LAN or USB function calls and thus makes the transport interface transparent for the user.
  • Page 707 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics For details on configuring the LAN connection, see Chapter 12.5.1, "How to Configure Network", on page 756. ● VXI-11 Protocol..................... 704 ● HiSLIP Protocol.....................704 ● Socket Communication..................704 ● LXI Web Browser Interface...................
  • Page 708 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics The simplest way to establish socket communication is to use the built-in telnet pro- gram. The telnet program is part of every operating system and supports a communi- cation with the software on a command-by-command basis. For more convenience and to enable automation by means of programs, user-defined sockets can be program- med.
  • Page 709 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics The navigation pane of the browser interface contains the following elements: ● "LXI" – "Home" opens the instrument home page. The home page displays the device information required by the LXI standard, including the VISA resource string in read-only format.
  • Page 710 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics – "File Upload" uploads files to the instrument. (See Chapter 12.5.5, "How to Control the R&S FSW via the Web Browser Inter- face", on page 766.) ● "License Manager" – "License Manager" allows you to install or uninstall license keys and to acti- vate, register or unregister licenses.
  • Page 711 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Figure 12-1: Communication lines used by the GPIB interface User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 36...
  • Page 712 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Universal Commands Universal commands are encoded in the range 10 through 1F hex. They affect all instruments connected to the bus and do not require addressing. Command Effect on the instrument DCL (Device Clear) Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the com- mand processing software to a defined initial state.

  • Page 713: Scpi (Standard Commands For Programmable Instruments)

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics USB::<vendor ID>::<product ID>::<serial number>[::INSTR] where: ● <vendor ID> is the vendor ID for Rohde & Schwarz (0x0AAD) ● <product ID> is the product ID for the Rohde & Schwarz instrument ● <serial number>...

  • Page 714: Messages

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics ● An appropriately defined VISA alias (short name). A VISA installation is a prerequisite for remote control using the following interfaces: ● Chapter 12.1.1.2, "GPIB Interface (IEC 625/IEEE 418 Bus Interface)", on page 707 ●...

  • Page 715: Scpi Command Structure

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics "SCPI confirmed" in the command reference chapters. Commands without this SCPI label are device-specific; however, their syntax follows SCPI rules as per- mitted by the standard. Instrument responses Instrument responses (response messages and service requests) are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query.
  • Page 716 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics 12.1.5.2 Syntax for Device-Specific Commands Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the instrument. For demonstration purposes only, assume the existence of the following commands for this section: ●...
  • Page 717 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Example: Definition: HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>] Command: HCOP:PAGE:DIM:QUAD2 This command refers to the quadrant 2. Different numbering in remote control For remote control, the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selec- tion used in manual operation.
  • Page 718 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics ● Numeric Values..................... 715 ● Special Numeric Values..................715 ● Boolean Parameters..................... 716 ● Text Parameters....................716 ● Character Strings....................716 ● Block Data......................717 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form, i.e. with sign, decimal point and exponent. Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down.
  • Page 719 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics ● INF and NINF: INFinity and negative INFinity (NINF) represent the numeric values 9.9E37 or -9.9E37, respectively. INF and NINF are only sent as instrument respon- ses. ● NAN: Not A Number (NAN) represents the value 9.91E37. NAN is only sent as a instrument response.
  • Page 720 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Example: HCOP:ITEM:LABel "Test1" HCOP:ITEM:LABel 'Test1' Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data. For example, a command using a block data parameter has the following structure: FORMat:READings:DATA #45168xxxxxxxx The ASCII character # introduces the data block.
  • Page 721 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 12-5: Special characters Parameters A vertical stroke in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the sense of "or". The effect of the command differs, depending on which parameter is used. Example: Definition:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI LAND specifies landscape orientation...
  • Page 722 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Example: HCOP:ITEM ALL;:HCOP:IMM This command line contains two commands. Both commands are part of the HCOP command system, i.e. they have one level in common. If the successive commands belong to the same system, having one or several levels in common, the command line can be abbreviated.

  • Page 723: Command Sequence And Synchronization

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics 12.1.6 Command Sequence and Synchronization IEEE 488.2 defines a distinction between overlapped and sequential commands: ● A sequential command is one which finishes executing before the next command starts executing. Commands that are processed quickly are usually implemented as sequential commands.
  • Page 724 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Example: Overlapping command with *OPC The instrument implements INITiate[:IMMediate] as an overlapped command. Assuming that INITiate[:IMMediate] takes longer to execute than *OPC, sending the following command sequence results in initiating a sweep and, after some time, setting the OPC bit in the ESR: INIT;...

  • Page 725: Status Reporting System

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics 4. Wait for a service request. The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished. *OPC? with a service request 1. Set bit no. 4 in the SRE: *SRE 16 to enable MAV service request. 2.
  • Page 726 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics not used not used not used & logic AND not used of all bits logic OR one register for each channel Range completed Multi-Standard Capture Finish HCOPy in progress GAP ACLR FAIL LMARgin 8 FAIL CACLR FAIL LIMit 8 FAIL...
  • Page 727 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics ● IST, PPE The IST flag ("Individual STatus"), like the SRQ, combines the entire instrument status in a single bit. The PPE fulfills the same function for the IST flag as the SRE for the service request.
  • Page 728 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics part can only be read, but not written into or cleared. Its contents are not affected by reading. ● PTRansition / NTRansition The two transition register parts define which state transition of the CONDition part (none, 0 to 1, 1 to 0 or both) is stored in the EVENt part.
  • Page 729 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ register The STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ register is used for digital I/Q data from the optional Digital Baseband Interface and is described in the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual. STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC register The STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC register is used by the R&S FSW applications and is described in the individual sections (manuals) for each application.
  • Page 730 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 12-7: Meaning of the bits used in the status byte Bit No. Meaning 0...1 Not used Error Queue not empty The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue. If this bit is enabled by the SRE, each entry of the error queue generates a service request.
  • Page 731 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 12-8: Meaning of the bits used in the event status register Bit No. Meaning Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed.
  • Page 732 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Bit No. Meaning MEASuring Measurement is being performed in base unit (applications are not considered); identical to bit 3 In applications, this bit is not used. Waiting for TRIgger Instrument is ready to trigger and waiting for trigger signal. Not used HardCOPy in progress This bit is set while the instrument is printing a hardcopy.
  • Page 733 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 12-10: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable register Bit No. Meaning 0 - 1 Unused "TIMe" This bit is set if a time error occurs in any of the active channels. STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe Register provides more information on the error type.
  • Page 734 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register The STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register contains information about the results of a limit check during ACLR measurements. A separate ACPLimit register exists for each active channel. You can read out the register withSTATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:CONDition? STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]? Table 12-11: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register...
  • Page 735 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 12-12: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended register Bit No. Meaning not used INFO This bit is set if a status message is available for the application. Which type of message occurred is indicated in the STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO Register.
  • Page 736 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency: or STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?. CONDition? Table 12-14: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register Bit No. Meaning OVEN COLD This bit is set if the reference oscillator has not yet attained its operating temperature. "OCXO" is displayed.
  • Page 737 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Bit No. Meaning LIMit 8 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 8 is violated. 8 to 14 Unused This bit is always 0. STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin Register This register contains information about the observance of limit margins. A separate LMARgin register exists for each active channel and for each window.
  • Page 738 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 12-17: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register Bit No. Meaning OVERload This bit is set if an overload occurs at the RF input, causing signal distortion but not yet causing damage to the device.
  • Page 739 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 12-19: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe register Bit No. Meaning not used Sweep time too low This bit is set if the sweep time is too low. 2 to 14 Unused This bit is always 0.
  • Page 740 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics 3. CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "*INIT;*OPC") ' Generate an SRQ after operation complete After its settings have been completed, the instrument generates an SRQ. A detailed example for a service request routine is provided in Chapter 13.15.2, "Ser- vice Request",...
  • Page 741 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the SRQ. Decimal representation of a bit pattern The STB and ESR registers contain 8 bits, the SCPI registers 16 bits. The contents of a status register are specified and transferred as a single decimal number.

  • Page 742: General Programming Recommendations

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 12-20: Resetting the status reporting system Event Switching on supply DCL, *RST or STA- *CLS voltage SYS- Tus:PRE- Tem:PRE Power-On-Status- (Device Clear Clear, Selected Device Effect Clear) Clear STB, ESR Clear SRE, ESE Clear PPE Clear EVENt parts of the regis-...

  • Page 743: Gpib Languages

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S GPIB Languages Reacting to malfunctions The service request is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own. Each controller program should instruct the instrument to initiate a service request in case of malfunction. The program should react appropriately to the service request.
  • Page 744 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S GPIB Languages Language Comment 8566B 8568A Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules regarding the command structure. 8568A_DC Uses DC input coupling by default if supported by the instrument 8568B Command sets A and B are available.

  • Page 745: The Iecwin Tool

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S The IECWIN Tool Table 12-21: Instrument settings for emulation of 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8594E; FSEA, FSEB, FSEM; FSEK instruments Model # of Trace Start Freq. Stop Freq. Ref Level Input Coupling Points 8566A/B 1001 2 GHz 22 GHz 0 dBm 8568A/B...

  • Page 746: Network And Remote Control Settings

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings ● Generation of a log file For command scripts, IECWIN offers the following features: ● Synchronization with the instrument on every command ● Checking expected result for query commands (as string or numeric value) ●...

  • Page 747: General Network Settings

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap- ter 13.10.7, "Configuring the Network and Remote Control", on page 1216. Step-by-step instructions are provided in Chapter 12.5, "How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control", on page 756.
  • Page 748 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings Computer Name......................745 Address........................745 Subnet Mask....................... 745 DHCP.......................... 745 Network Configuration....................745 Computer Name Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name, but this name can be changed. The naming conventions of Windows apply. If too many characters and/or numbers are entered, an error message is displayed in the status line.

  • Page 749: Gpib Settings

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings 12.4.2 GPIB Settings Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "GPIB" tab Alternatively to connecting the R&S FSW to a LAN, the GPIB interface can be used to connect a remote PC. For details see Chapter 12.1.1.2, "GPIB Interface (IEC 625/IEEE 418 Bus Interface)",...
  • Page 750 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings Reset to Factory String Restores the default identification string. Each R&S FSW has a unique ID according to the following syntax: Rohde&Schwarz,FSW,<Unique number> Remote command: on page 1218 SYSTem:IDENtify:FACTory Remote Display Update Defines whether the display of the R&S FSW is updated when changing from manual operation to remote control.

  • Page 751: Compatibility Settings

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings where <no.> is a sequential number A new log file is started each time logging was stopped and is restarted. Logging the commands may be extremely useful for debug purposes, e.g. in order to find misspelled keywords in control programs.
  • Page 752 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings Language........................749 Gain........................750 Sweep Repeat......................750 Coupling........................750 Wideband........................750 FSU/FSQ Preamplifier....................751 Additional......................751 Revision String......................751 Resetting the Factory Revision................... 751 Language Defines the system language used to control the instrument. For details on the available GPIB languages, see Chapter 13.13.2, "Reference: GPIB Commands of Emulated HP...
  • Page 753 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings Note: For PSA89600 emulation, the option is indicated as "B7J" for the *OPT? query ("B7J, 140" or "B7J, 122" if Wideband is activated, see SYSTem:PSA:WIDeband on page 1250). Remote command: on page 1249 SYSTem:LANGuage IF Gain...

  • Page 754: Lxi Settings

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings "Off" No wideband is used. The option is indicated as "B7J". "40 MHz" The 40 MHz wideband is used. The option is indicated as "B7J, 140". "80 MHz" The 80 MHz wideband is used. The option is indicated as "B7J, 122".
  • Page 755 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings The "LXI" tab of the "Network + Remote" dialog box provides basic LXI functions and information for the R&S FSW. Alternatively, you can change the LAN settings using the LXI Web browser interface. For details see Chapter 12.5.1.4, "How to Configure the LAN Using the LXI Web Browser...

  • Page 756: Remote Errors

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings "ICMP" Indicates whether the ping responder is active or not "VXI-11 Dis- If enabled, connected devices are detected automatically using the VXI-11 protocol (see "VXI-11 Protocol" on page 704) covery"...
  • Page 757 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings The most recent error message during remote operation can be displayed on the screen, see "Display Remote Errors" on page 748. If the number of error messages exceeds the capacity of the error buffer, the oldest error message is removed before the newest one is inserted.

  • Page 758: Returning To Manual Mode ("Local")

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings Remote command: on page 1224 SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:REMote 12.4.6 Returning to Manual Mode ("Local") When switched on, the instrument is always in the manual measurement mode and can be operated via the front panel. As soon as the instrument receives a remote com- mand, it is switched to the remote control mode.

  • Page 759: How To Set Up A Network And Remote Control

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 12.5 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control Risk of network failure Consult your network administrator before performing the following tasks: ● Connecting the instrument to the network ●...
  • Page 760 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control Windows Firewall Settings A firewall protects an instrument by preventing unauthorized users from gaining access to it through a network. Rohde & Schwarz highly recommends the use of the firewall on your instrument.
  • Page 761 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control By default, the instrument is configured to use dynamic TCP/IP configuration and obtain all address information automatically. This means that it is safe to establish a physical connection to the LAN without any previous instrument configuration.
  • Page 762 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 7. Close the dialog box. If you have entered an invalid IP address or subnet mask, the message "out of range" is displayed in the status line. If the settings are correct, the configuration is saved, and you are prompted to restart the instrument.
  • Page 763 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 12.5.1.3 How to Change the Instrument Name In a LAN that uses a DNS server (Domain Name System server), each PC or instru- ment connected in the LAN can be accessed via an unambiguous computer name instead of the IP address.
  • Page 764 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control The instrument home page displays the device information required by the LXI stan- dard including the VISA resource string in read-only format. ► Press the "Device Indicator" button on the "Instrument Home Page" to activate or deactivate the LXI status icon on the status bar of the R&S FSW.
  • Page 765 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control ● "Ping Client" provides the ping utility to verify the connection between the instru- ment and other devices. IP Configuration The "LAN Configuration > IP configuration" web page displays all mandatory LAN parameters and allows their modification.

  • Page 766: How To Operate The Instrument Without A Network

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 2. Enter the IP address of the second device without the ping command and with- out any further parameters into the "Destination Address" field (e.g. 10.113.10.203).
  • Page 767 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control Refer to Chapter 11, "General Instrument Setup", on page 631 to find out which func- tions are affected. At the same time you log on to the operating system, you are automatically logged on to the network.

  • Page 768: How To Share Directories (Only With Microsoft Networks)

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control The new password is now active. 12.5.3.3 How to Activate or Deactivate the Automatic Login Mechanism Deactivating the automatic login mechanism When shipped, the instrument is already configured to automatically log on under Win- dows .

  • Page 769: How To Control The R&S Fsw Via The Web Browser Interface

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 12.5.5 How to Control the R&S FSW via the Web Browser Interface Via the LXI browser interface to the R&S FSW one or more users can control the instrument remotely from another PC without additional installation.

  • Page 770: How To Deactivate The Web Browser Interface

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control The most commonly used folders on the instrument are displayed, for example those that contain user data, as well as the top-most My Computer folder, from which you can access all other folders on the instrument.

  • Page 771: How To Set Up Remote Desktop

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 6. Set "Startup type" to "Disabled". 7. Select "Stop". 8. Select "Apply". The next time a user enters the IP address of the instrument in a web browser, an error message is displayed: Failed to connect to server (code.
  • Page 772 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control Note: To avoid problems, use a fixed IP address. When a DHCP server is used, a new IP address is assigned each time the instru- ment is restarted.
  • Page 773 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 12.5.7.2 How to Configure the Controller Remote Desktop Client With Windows , Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system and can be accessed via "Start > Programs > Accessories > Remote Desktop Connection". For other versions of Windows, Microsoft offers the Remote Desktop Client as an add- Select the "Windows"...
  • Page 774 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 6. To improve the performance, you can deactivate the "Desktop background", "Show contents of window while dragging" and "Menu and window animation" options. 7. Open the "Local Resources" tab for enabling printers, local drives and serial inter- faces.
  • Page 775 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control The options for configuring the R&S FSW screen display are displayed. 11. Under "Remote desktop size", you can set the size of the R&S FSW window on the desktop of the controller.
  • Page 776 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control ● Press the key combination [ALT] + [F4]. ● The R&S FSW firmware is shut down, which may take a few sec- onds. ● On the desktop, double-tap the "Analyzer" icon. The firmware restarts and then automatically opens the "Soft Front Panel", i.e.

  • Page 777: How To Start A Remote Control Session From A Pc

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 2. On the R&S FSW, a user logs on. The connection to the controller is terminated as a result. A message is displayed on the controller display indicating that another user has assumed control of the instrument.

  • Page 778: How To Return To Manual Operation

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 4. To prevent unintentional return to manual operation, disable the keys of the instru- ment using the universal command LLO. Switching to manual mode is only possible via remote control then. This function is only available for the GPIB interface.

  • Page 779: Remote Commands

    ® Remote Commands R&S Conventions Used in SCPI Command Descriptions 13 Remote Commands The commands required to perform measurements in the Spectrum application in a remote environment are described here. It is assumed that the R&S FSW has already been set up for remote operation in a net- work as described in Chapter 12.5, "How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control",...

  • Page 780: Common Suffixes

    ® Remote Commands R&S Common Commands Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values. ● Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con- firmed. All commands used by the R&S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules. ●...
  • Page 781 ® Remote Commands R&S Common Commands ..........................779 *IDN? ..........................779 *IST? ..........................779 *OPC ...........................779 *OPT? ..........................780 *PCB ..........................780 *PRE ..........................780 *PSC ..........................781 *RST ..........................781 *SRE ...........................781 *STB? ..........................781 *TRG ........................... 781 *TST? ..........................782 *WAI *CAL? Calibration query...
  • Page 782 ® Remote Commands R&S Common Commands Returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form and subsequently sets the register to zero. Return values: <Contents> Range: 0 to 255 Usage: Query only *IDN? Identification Returns the instrument identification. Return values: <ID>...
  • Page 783 ® Remote Commands R&S Common Commands Return values: <Options> The query returns a list of all installed and activated options, separated by commas, where: B<number> describes hardware options K<number> describes software options For PSA89600 emulation, the option is indicated as "B7J" for the *OPT? query ("B7J, 140"...
  • Page 784 ® Remote Commands R&S Common Commands *RST Reset Sets the instrument to a defined default status. The default settings are indicated in the description of commands. The command is equivalent to SYSTem:PRESet. Note that the factory set default values can be modified to user-defined settings (see on page 1163).

  • Page 785: Selecting The Operating Mode And Application

    ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Note: If you start a self-test remotely, then select the "Local" softkey while the test is still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the test is completed.
  • Page 786 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application DISPlay:ATAB <State> This command switches between the MultiView tab and the most recently displayed channel. If only one channel is active, this command has no effect. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0 ON | 1 The MultiView tab is displayed.
  • Page 787 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application <ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel. The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the channel. Note: If the specified name for a new channel already exists, the default name, extended by a sequential number, is used for the new channel (see on page 785).
  • Page 788 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Example: INST:DEL 'IQAnalyzer4' Deletes the channel with the name 'IQAnalyzer4'. Usage: Event Manual operation: "Closing an application" on page 118 INSTrument:LIST? This command queries all active channels. This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing channels, which are required in order to replace or delete the channels.
  • Page 789 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Application <ChannelType> Default Channel name*) parameter I/Q Analyzer IQ Analyzer LTE (R&S FSW-K10x) Multi-Carrier Group Delay (R&S FSW-K17) MCGD MC Group Delay NB-IoT (R&S FSW-K106) NIOT NB-IoT Noise (R&S FSW-K30) NOISE Noise 5G NR (R&S FSW-K144)
  • Page 790 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Parameters: <OpMode> SANalyzer Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode MSRanalyzer Multi-Standard Radio Analysis (MSRA) mode RTMStandard Multi-Standard Real-Time (MSRT) mode Only available if one of the real-time options is installed. *RST: Example: INST:MODE MSR Switches to Multi-Standard Radio Analysis (MSRA) mode.

  • Page 791: Performing A Sequence Of Measurements

    ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application <ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel. INST IQ Example: Activates a channel for the I/Q Analyzer application (evaluation mode). INST 'MyIQSpectrum' Selects the channel named 'MyIQSpectrum' (for example before executing further commands for that channel).
  • Page 792 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application ..................789 INITiate<n>:SEQuencer:ABORt ..................789 INITiate<n>:SEQuencer:IMMediate ..................789 INITiate<n>:SEQuencer:MODE ...................... 790 SYSTem:SEQuencer INITiate<n>:SEQuencer:ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements. The Sequencer itself is not deactivated, so you can start a new sequence immediately using on page 789.
  • Page 793 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Note: In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI you must use SINGle Sequence mode. For details on synchronization see Chapter 12.1.6, "Command Sequence and Syn- chronization", on page 720 Suffix:...

  • Page 794: Programming Example: Performing A Sequence Of Measurements

    ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1 ON | 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately. OFF | 0 The Sequencer is deactivated. Any running sequential measure- ments are stopped.
  • Page 795 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application //Set sweep count in Spectrum channel SENS:SWEEP:COUNT 5 //----------Creating a second measurement channel ---------------- //Create second IQ channel INSTrument:CREate:NEW IQ,'IQ 2' //Set sweep count SENS:SWEEP:COUNT 2 //Change trace modes DISP:TRAC1:MODE MAXH DISP:TRAC2:MODE MINH //Create new analyzer channel INSTrument:CREate:NEW SANalyzer,'Spectrum 2'...

  • Page 796: Configuring And Performing Measurements

    ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //Sweep all channels once, taking the sweep count in each channel into account INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate;*OPC? //Set marker to maximum in IQ1 and query result CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum CALC:MARK:Y? //Switch to second IQ channel and retrieve results INST:SEL 'IQ 2';*WAI CALCulate:MARKer:MIN CALC:MARK:Y?
  • Page 797 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ● on page 884 INITiate<n>:SPURious Remote commands exclusive for performing measurements: .......................... 794 ABORt ....................794 INITiate<n>:CONMeas ....................795 INITiate<n>:CONTinuous ....................796 INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] ................796 [SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt:CURRent? ABORt This command aborts the measurement in the current channel and resets the trigger system.
  • Page 798 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements The measurement is restarted at the beginning, not where the previous measurement was stopped. As opposed to INITiate<n>[:IMMediate], this command does not reset traces in maxhold, minhold or average mode. Therefore it can be used to continue measure- ments using maxhold or averaging functions.
  • Page 799 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: INIT:CONT OFF Switches the sweep mode to single sweep. INIT:CONT ON Switches the sweep mode to continuous sweep. Manual operation: " Frequency Sweep " on page 125 " Zero Span " on page 125 "...

  • Page 800: Configuring Power Measurements

    ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: SWE:COUNt 64 Sets sweep count to 64 INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT Starts a sweep (without waiting for the sweep end!) SWE:COUN:CURR? Queries the number of started sweeps Usage: Query only 13.5.2 Configuring Power Measurements...
  • Page 801 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <sb> 1 | 2 | 3 (4 | 5) Sub block in a Multi-standard radio measurement; MSR ACLR: 1 to 5 Multi-SEM: 1 to 3 for all other measurements: irrelevant User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 36...
  • Page 802 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Query parameters: <Measurement> ACPower | MCACpower ACLR measurements (also known as adjacent channel power or multicarrier adjacent channel measurements). Returns the power for every active transmission and adjacent channel. The order is: •...
  • Page 803 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements For SEM measurements, the return value is the peak power of the reference range (in the specified sub block). Note that this result is only available if the power reference type is set to peak power (see [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RTYPe on page 867).
  • Page 804 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] <State> This command turns a power measurement on and off. Suffix: <n>, <m> irrelevant Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0 ON | 1 The power measurement selected with CALCulate<n>: is activated.

  • Page 805: Measuring The Channel Power And Aclr

    ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements This automatic routine makes sure that the that the signal power level does not over- load the R&S FSW or limit the dynamic range by too small a S/N ratio. To determine the best reference level, the R&S FSW aborts current measurements and performs a series of test sweeps.
  • Page 806 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ............ 803 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet ........803 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:CATalog? ........803 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:DELete ........804 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:SAVE CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet <Standard> This command loads a measurement configuration. The measurement configuration for power measurements consists of weighting filter, channel bandwidth and spacing, resolution and video bandwidth, detector and sweep time.
  • Page 807 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Standard> String containing the file name of the standard. Usage: Event Manual operation: " User Standards " on page 162 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:SAVE <Standard> This command saves the current ACLR measurement configuration as a new ACLR standard.
  • Page 808 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation: " Number of channels: Tx , Adj " on page 163 " Number of Adjacent Channels ( Adj Count )" on page 179 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:ACHannel <Bandwidth> [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel <Bandwidth> This command defines the channel bandwidth of the adjacent channels. The adjacent channels are the first channels to the left and right of the transmission channels.
  • Page 809 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth[:CHANnel<ch>] <Bandwidth> [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth[:CHANnel<ch>] <Bandwidth> This command defines the channel bandwidth of the transmission channels. Steep-edged channel filters are available for fast ACLR measurements. Suffix: <ch> 1 to 18 Tx channel number Parameters: <Bandwidth>...
  • Page 810 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <ch> 1 to 18 Tx channel number Parameters: <Name> String containing the name of the channel *RST: TX<1...12> Manual operation: " Channel Names " on page 169 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel] <Spacing> This command defines the distance from transmission channel to adjacent channel. For MSR signals, this command defines the distance from the CF of the first Tx chan- nel in the first sub block to the lower adjacent channel.
  • Page 811 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<ch> <Spacing> This command defines the distance between transmission channels. If you set the channel spacing for a transmission channel, the R&S FSW sets the spac- ing of the lower transmission channels to the same value, but not the other way round. The command works hierarchically: to set a distance between the 2nd and 3rd and 3rd and 4th channel, you have to set the spacing between the 2nd and 3rd channel first.
  • Page 812 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Alpha> Roll-off factor Range: 0 to 1 *RST: 0.22 Manual operation: " Weighting Filters " on page 169 " Weighting Filters " on page 180 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa[:ALL] <Value> This command defines the alpha value for the weighting filter for all channels. Parameters: <Value>...
  • Page 813 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ACHannel <State> This command turns the weighting filter for the adjacent channel on and off. For asymmetrical MSR signals, this command turns the weighting filter for the lower adjacent channel on and off. To configure the filter state for the upper adjacent chan- nel, use the com- [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UACHannel...
  • Page 814 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0 *RST: Manual operation: " Weighting Filters " on page 169 13.5.3.4 Selecting the Reference Channel The following commands define the reference channel for relative ACLR measure- ments.
  • Page 815 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Note that this command is not available for MSR ACLR measurements (see on page 803). CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet Parameters: <ChannelNumber> Range: 1 to 18 *RST: Manual operation: " Reference Channel " on page 164 13.5.3.5 Checking Limits The following commands configure and query limit checks for channel power and...
  • Page 816 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe <State>,<State> This command turns the absolute limit check for the adjacent channels on and off. You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe]. Suffix: <n>, <li>...
  • Page 817 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult? This command queries the state of the limit check for the adjacent channels in an ACLR measurement. To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result.
  • Page 818 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:ABSolute <LowerLimit>, <UpperLimit> This command defines the absolute limit of the alternate channels. If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit, the R&S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check. Suffix: <n>, <li>...
  • Page 819 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative] <LowerLimit>, <UpperLimit> This command defines the relative limit of the alternate channels. The reference value for the relative limit is the measured channel power. If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit, the R&S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check.
  • Page 820 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: INIT:IMM;*WAI; CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES? PASSED,PASSED Usage: Query only CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative]:STATe <State>,<State> This command turns the relative limit check for the alternate channels on and off. You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
  • Page 821 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation: " Limit Check " on page 168 " Limit Checking " on page 175 " Limit Checking " on page 181 " Limit Checking " on page 184 13.5.3.6 General ACLR Measurement Settings The following commands control the measurement algorithm.
  • Page 822 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ● General MSR ACLR Measurement Settings............819 ● MSR Sub Block and Tx Channel Setup..............819 ● MSR Adjacent Channel Setup................821 ● MSR Gap Channel Setup..................826 ● MSR Channel Names................... 831 General MSR ACLR Measurement Settings Useful commands for configuring general MSR ACLR settings described elsewhere: ●...
  • Page 823 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <ch> 1 to 18 Tx channel number Parameters: <Alpha> Roll-off factor Range: 0 to 1 *RST: 0.22 Manual operation: " Weighting Filters " on page 178 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:SBLock<sb>:CHANnel<ch> <State> This command turns the weighting filter for the specified transmission channel on and off.
  • Page 824 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <ch> 1 to 18 Tx channel number Parameters: <Bandwidth> Bandwidth in Hz Manual operation: " Tx Channel Bandwidth " on page 178 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:CENTer[:CHANnel<ch>] <Frequency> This command defines the (absolute) center frequency of the specified MSR Tx chan- nel.
  • Page 825 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ● "MSR Channel Names" on page 831 Remote commands exclusive to MSR adjacent channel setup: ............822 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:RFBWidth .......822 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:TECHnology[:CHANnel<ch>] ..........823 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:TXCHannel:COUNt ............. 823 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:UACHannel ............824 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:UALTernate<ch> ................824 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SSETup ...............824 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:UACHannel ............
  • Page 826 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Standard> GSM | WCDMa | LTE_1_40 | LTE_3_00 | LTE_5_00 | LTE_10_00 | LTE_15_00 | LTE_20_00 | USER Technology used for transmission Transmission according to GSM standard WCDMa Transmission according to W-CDMA standard LTE_1_40 | LTE_3_00 | LTE_5_00 | LTE_10_00 | LTE_15_00 | LTE_20_00 Transmission according to LTE standard for different channel...
  • Page 827 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:UALTernate<ch> <Spacing> This command defines the distance from transmission channel to the upper alternate channels. For MSR signals, this command defines the distance from the CF of the last Tx chan- nel in the last sub block to the upper alternate channel in asymmetrical configurations. To configure the spacing for the lower alternate channel, use the [SENSe:]POWer: command.
  • Page 828 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Bandwidth> Range: 100 Hz to 1000 MHz *RST: 14 kHz Manual operation: " Adjacent Channel Bandwidths " on page 180 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:UALTernate<ch> <Bandwidth> [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:UALTernate<ch> <Bandwidth> This command defines the channel bandwidth of the upper alternate channels in asym- metrical configurations.
  • Page 829 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Alpha> Roll-off factor Range: 0 to 1 *RST: 0.22 Manual operation: " Weighting Filters " on page 180 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UACHannel <State> This command turns the weighting filter for the upper adjacent channel on and off for asymmetrical MSR signals.
  • Page 830 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ............830 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap> ..............830 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GAP<gap>:MSIZe .............. 831 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP<gap> CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:ABSolute <Limit>, <Reserved> This command defines the absolute limit of the specified gap (CACLR) channel. If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit, the R&S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check.
  • Page 831 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <gap> 1 | 2 Gap channel number Parameters: <Limit> Defines the relative limit for the ACLR power in the specified gap channel in dB. Example: CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP1:ACLR:REL 3dB Manual operation: " Limit Checking " on page 184 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:ACLR[:RELative]:STATe <State>...
  • Page 832 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:CACLr][:RELative]:STATe <State> This command turns the relative limit check for the CACLR power in the specified gap channel on and off. You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
  • Page 833 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Bandwidth> numeric value in Hz *RST: 3.84 MHz Manual operation: " Gap Channel Bandwidths " on page 183 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP<gap> <Alpha> This command defines the roll-off factor for the specified gap (CACLR) channel's weighting filter.
  • Page 834 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation: " Minimum gap size to show Gap 1 / Minimum gap size to show Gap 2 " on page 182 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP<gap> <Spacing> This command defines the distance from sub block to the specified gap channel. The channels in the upper gap are identical to those in the lower gap.
  • Page 835 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <ch> 1 to 11 Alternate channel number Parameters: <Name> String containing the name of the channel *RST: ALT<1...11> [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:NAME[:CHANnel<ch>] <Name> This command defines the name of the specified MSR Tx channel. This command is for MSR signals only.
  • Page 836 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Remote commands exclusive to channel power measurements ..........833 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:ACLR:RESult ......... 833 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:CACLr]:RESult? ..........834 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult:PHZ .................. 834 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:ACLR:RESult The command returns the ACLR power limit check results for the selected gap channel in an MSR ACLR measurement.
  • Page 837 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Return values: <LowerGap_AB>, Limit check results for the CACLR power in the upper and lower <UpperGap_AB> gap channels for the selected gap. Results are only returned for [,<LowerGap_BC>, the available sub blocks. <UpperGap_BC>, PASSED <LowerGap_CD>,...
  • Page 838 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Mode> ABSolute Shows the absolute power of all channels RELative Shows the power of adjacent and alternate channels in relation to the transmission channel *RST: RELative Manual operation: " Absolute and Relative Values (ACLR Mode) " on page 165 13.5.3.10 Programming Examples for Channel Power Measurements...
  • Page 839 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements POW:ACH:BWID:ACH 30kHz //Define a bandwidth of 30 kHz for the first alternate channel. POW:ACH:BWID:ALT1 30kHz //Define a distance of 33 kHz from the center of the transmission channel to the //center of the adjacent channel. //Also adjust the distance to the alternate channels (66 kHz).
  • Page 840 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //Turn the relative limit check for adjacent channels on. CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:STAT ON //Turn the absolute limit check for adjacent channels on. CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS:STAT ON //Turn the absolute limit check for the first alternate channel on. CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT1:ABS:STAT ON //--------------Performing the Measurement----- //Determine the ideal ACLR measurement configuration.
  • Page 841 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:RFBWidth 12MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:CENTer:CHANnel1 1.226GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:CENTer:CHANnel2 1.230GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:CENTer:CHANnel3 1.234GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:TECHnology:CHANnel1 WCDMA :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:TECHnology:CHANnel2 WCDMA :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:TECHnology:CHANnel3 GSM :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:BANDwidth:CHANnel1 2.5MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:BANDwidth:CHANnel2 2.5MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:BANDwidth:CHANnel3 2.5MHZ //----------------- Configuring Sub block B :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:TXCHannel:COUNt 1 :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:FREQuency:CENTer 1.255GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:RFBWidth 4MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:CENTer:CHANnel1 1.255GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:TECHnology:CHANnel1 LTE_1_40 :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:BANDwidth:CHANnel1 3.25MHZ //----------------- Configuring Sub block C...

  • Page 842: Measuring The Carrier-To-Noise Ratio

    ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP1 2.0MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP2 5.0MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP1 2.0MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP2 2.0MHZ //--------------Performing the Measurement----- //Select single sweep mode. INIT:CONT OFF //Initiate a new measurement and wait until the sweep has finished. INIT;*WAI //---------------Retrieving Results------------- //Return the results for the ACLR measurement. CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? MCAC //Results: //Transmission channels in sub block A...

  • Page 843: Measuring The Occupied Bandwidth

    ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //----------Preparing the measurement------------ *RST //Reset the instrument FREQ:CENT 800MHz //Sets the center frequency to the carrier frequency of 800 MHz. CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL CN //Activates carrier-to-noise ratio measurement. POW:ACH:PRES CN //Optimizes the instrument settings according to the channel bandwidth. POW:ACH:PRES:RLEV //Determines the ideal reference level for the measurement.
  • Page 844 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ● on page 1083 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt Performing the measurement: ● on page 800 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect ● on page 801 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] Retrieving results: ● on page 797 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? Remote commands exclusive to occupied bandwidth measurements: ....................

  • Page 845: Remote Commands For Noise Power Ratio (Npr) Measurements

    ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //Set the trace detector to positive peak. DET APE //--------------Performing the Measurement----- //Select single sweep mode.INIT:CONT OFF //Initiate a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished. INIT;*WAI //---------------Retrieving Results------------- //Return the occupied bandwidth. CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW 13.5.6 Remote Commands for Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurements ●...
  • Page 846 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ............844 [SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:BWIDth[:ABSolute] ................ 845 [SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:COUNt ............ 845 [SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:FREQuency:OFFSet [SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:BWIDth <Frequency> Defines the channel bandwidth as an absolute value. Bandwidths covered by defined notches are deducted from this value. Parameters: <Frequency> *RST: 72 MHz Default unit: HZ Example:...
  • Page 847 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Frequency> *RST: 72 MHz Default unit: HZ Example: NPR:CHAN:INT:AUTO OFF Selects manual definition of the integration bandwidth. NPR:CHAN:INT:BWID 100000000 Sets the integration bandwidth to 100 MHz. Manual operation: "Integration Bandwidth" on page 214 [SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:INTegration:FREQuency:OFFSet <Frequency>...
  • Page 848 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Frequency> Default unit: HZ Example: NPR:NOTC1:BWID 50000000 Manual operation: "Notch Bandwidth (Absolute / Relative to Channel BW)" on page 214 [SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:COUNt <Amount> Defines the number of notches for which results are determined. Note that even if bandwidths for further notches are defined, only the number specified here are actually calculated and displayed.
  • Page 849 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <ResultType> CPOWer | NPOWer | NPRatio | ALL CPOWer Returns the total measured power divided by the channel band- width (without notches) or integration bandwidth (with notches) in dBm/Hz NPOWer Returns the power measured in each notch divided by the notch bandwidth in dBm/Hz NPRatio Returns the ratio of the total channel power density divided by...

  • Page 850: Measuring The Spectrum Emission Mask

    ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //--------------Performing the Measurement----- //Select single sweep mode. INIT:CONT OFF //Initiate a new measurement and wait until the sweep has finished. INIT;*WAI //---------------Retrieving Results------------- //Query the noise power ratio for each notch. CALC:NPR:RES? ALL //Result: //9.38,-51.73,-4685,-61.10,-56.26 //Query the measured power in each trace point...
  • Page 851 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:RESTore This command restores the predefined limit lines for the selected Spectrum Emission Mask standard. All modifications made to the predefined limit lines are lost and the factory-set values are restored. Suffix: <n>, <li>, <sb>...
  • Page 852 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet:STORe <Standard> This command saves the current SEM measurement configuration. Standard definitions are stored in an xml file. The default directory for SEM standards is C:\R_S\INSTR\sem_std. Suffix: <sb> 1 | 2 | 3 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement Parameters: <Standard>...
  • Page 853 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 13.5.7.3 Configuring a Multi-SEM Measurement In the Spectrum application only, spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub blocks of channels (see Chapter 6.6.4.5, "SEM with Multiple Sub Blocks ("Multi- SEM")", on page 228). Up to three sub blocks (with two gaps) can be defined. For each sub block, the familiar configuration settings concerning ranges, limit lines etc.
  • Page 854 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation: " Sub Block Count " on page 238 13.5.7.4 Configuring a Sweep List The following commands define a sweep list for SEM measurements. The sweep list cannot be configured using remote commands during an on-going sweep operation.
  • Page 855 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <sb> 1 | 2 | 3 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0 *RST: Example: ESP:HSP ON Manual operation: " Fast SEM " on page 234 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth:RESolution <RBW>...
  • Page 856 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<range>:COUNt? <Ranges> This command queries the number of ranges in the sweep list (<range> is irrelevant). Suffix: <sb> 1 | 2 | 3 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement Return values: <Ranges> Number of ranges in the sweep list.
  • Page 857 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <FilterType> NORMal Gaussian filters CFILter channel filters RRC filters CISPr | PULSe CISPR (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option Return value for query is always PULS. MIL Std (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option 5 Pole filters *RST: NORM...
  • Page 858 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STOP <Frequency> This command defines the stop frequency of a SEM range. Make sure to set an appropriate span. If you set a span that is ● smaller than the span the SEM sweep list covers, the R&S FSW will not measure the ranges that are outside the span - results may be invalid.
  • Page 859 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO <State> This command turns automatic selection of the input attenuation for a SEM range on and off. In case of high speed measurements, the input attenuation has to be identical for all ranges.
  • Page 860 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <sb> 1 | 2 | 3 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement <range> 1..30 Selects the measurement range. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0 *RST: Manual operation: " Preamp " on page 235 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<range>:INSert <Mode>...
  • Page 861 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Level> Absolute limit at the start frequency of a SEM range. Range: -400 to 400 *RST: Default unit: dBm Example: SENSe:ESPectrum:RANGe:LIMit:ABSolute:STARt -10 For a detailed example see Chapter 13.5.7.11, "Example: SEM Measurement", on page 880.
  • Page 862 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <PClass> 1..4 Power class for which the limit is defined. Parameters: <Level> Relative limit at the start frequency of a SEM range. Range: -400 to 400 *RST: Default unit: dBc Example: SENS:ESP:RANG:LIM:REL:STAR -10 Manual operation: "...
  • Page 863 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <sb> 1 | 2 | 3 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement <range> 1..30 Selects the SEM range. <PClass> 1..4 Power class for which the limit is defined. Parameters: <Function> Defines the function to be used to determine the relative limit line start value The maximum of the relative and the absolute level is used as the limit start value.
  • Page 864 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Level> Relative limit at the stop frequency of a SEM range. Range: -400 to 400 *RST: Default unit: dBc Example: SENSe:ESPectrum:RANGe:LIMit:RELative:STOP -15 For a detailed example see Chapter 13.5.7.11, "Example: SEM Measurement", on page 880.
  • Page 865 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <sb> 1 | 2 | 3 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement <range> 1..30 Selects the SEM range. <PClass> 1..4 Power class for which the limit is defined. Parameters: <Function> Defines the function to be used to determine the relative limit line stop value The maximum of the relative and the absolute level is used as the limit stop value.
  • Page 866 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <State> ABSolute | RELative | AND | OR ABSolute Checks only the absolute limits defined. RELative Checks only the relative limits. Relative limits are defined as rel- ative to the measured power in the reference range. Combines the absolute and relative limit.
  • Page 867 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Function> NONE (reference ranges only:) the limit of the reference range is used; Reference ranges always use the function "NONE". sum of the two limit lines (calculated for linear powers) is used maximum of the two limit lines is used *RST: SUM (reference range: NONE)
  • Page 868 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO <State> This command turns automatic selection of the sweep time for a SEM range on and off. In case of high speed measurements, the sweep time has to be identical for all ranges. Suffix: <sb>...
  • Page 869 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:BWID <Bandwidth> This command defines the channel bandwidth of the reference range. The bandwidth is available if the power reference is the channel power. Suffix: <sb> 1 | 2 | 3 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement Parameters: <Bandwidth>...
  • Page 870 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Return values: <RefRange> Number of the current reference range. Range: 1 to 30 Usage: Query only [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RTYPe <Type> This command defines the type of the power reference. Suffix: <sb> 1 | 2 | 3 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement Parameters: <Type>...
  • Page 871 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Setting parameters: <Max1> Defines the value range for power class 1 as -200 to <Max1>. Only available for CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL:COUNT >=2 If only 2 power classes are defined, the value range for power class 2 is defined as <Max1>...
  • Page 872 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Mode> AUTO The power class (and thus the limit line) is assigned dynamically according to the currently measured channel power. MANUAL One of the specified power classes is selected manually for the entire measurement.
  • Page 873 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <sb> 1 | 2 | 3 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement Parameters: <NoPowerClasses> 1 to 4 *RST: Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL:COUN 2 Two power classes can be defined. Manual operation: " Adding or Removing a Power Class " on page 242 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<PClass>[:EXCLusive] <State>...
  • Page 874 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <State> ABSolute Evaluates only limit lines with absolute power values RELative Evaluates only limit lines with relative power values Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values. A negative result is returned if both limits fail. Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values.
  • Page 875 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ● The lower limit of a power class must always be the same as the upper limit of the previous power class. ● The power class must already exist (see CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>: on page 869). ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass:COUNt Suffix: <n>, <li>...
  • Page 876 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: //Select the band category 1 ESP2:MSR:BCAT 1 //Set the base station class to medium range ESP2:MSR:CLAS MED //Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm. ESP2:MSR:MPOW 10 //Set the frequency range of the base station to > 3 GHz ESP2:MSR:BAND:HIGH //Set the base station RF bandwidth to 20 MHz ESP2:MSR:RFBW 20MHZ...
  • Page 877 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <sb> 1 | 2 | 3 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement Parameters: <Category> 1 | 2 | 3 2 carriers: LTE FDD and W-CDMA 3 carriers: LTE FDD, W-CDMA and GSM/EDGE 2 carriers: LTE TDD and TD-SCDMA *RST: Example:...
  • Page 878 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: //Select the band category 1 ESP2:MSR:BCAT 1 //Set the base station class to medium range ESP2:MSR:CLAS MED //Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm. ESP2:MSR:MPOW 10 //Set the frequency range of the base station to > 3 GHz ESP2:MSR:BAND:HIGH //Set the base station RF bandwidth to 20 MHz ESP2:MSR:RFBW 20MHZ...
  • Page 879 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:GSM:CPResent <State> This command defines whether a GSM/Edge carrier is located at the edge of the speci- fied RF bandwidth. In this case, the specification demands specific limits for the SEM ranges. This command is only available for band category 2 (see [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>: on page 873).
  • Page 880 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: //Select the band category 2 ESP2:MSR:BCAT BC2 //Set the base station class to medium range ESP2:MSR:CLAS MED //Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm. ESP2:MSR:MPOW 10 //Set the base station RF bandwidth to 20 MHz ESP2:MSR:RFBW 20MHZ //LTE present ESP2:MSR:LTE:CPR ON...
  • Page 881 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Bandwidth> Bandwidth in Hz *RST: 10.0 MHz Example: //Select the band category 1 ESP2:MSR:BCAT 1 //Set the base station class to medium range ESP2:MSR:CLAS MED //Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm. ESP2:MSR:MPOW 10 //Set the frequency range of the base station to >...
  • Page 882 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: CALC:ESP:PSE:AUTO OFF Deactivates the list evaluation. Manual operation: " List Evaluation State (Result Summary)" on page 248 " List Evaluation State " on page 271 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch[:IMMediate] CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch[:IMMediate] This command initiates a list evaluation. Suffix: <n>...
  • Page 883 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: CALC:ESP:PSE:PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares. Manual operation: " Show Peaks " on page 248 " Show Peaks " on page 271 13.5.7.9 Performing an SEM Measurement The following commands are required to perform an SEM measurement: ●...
  • Page 884 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ESP:PRES 'WCDMA\3GPP\UL\3GPP_UL.xml' //------------ Defining the Reference Range----------------- //Query the current reference range. ESP:RRAN? //Select the channel power as the power reference. ESP:RTYP CPOW //Define a channel bandwidth of 4 MHz for the power reference. ESP:BWID 4 MHZ //Use an RRC filter with a roll-off factor of 0.5 when measuring //the reference power.
  • Page 885 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //Define a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz for range 2. ESP:RANG2:BAND:RES 1000000 //Select an RRC filter for range 2. ESP:RANG2:FILT:TYPE RRC //Define a video bandwidth of 5 MHz for range 2. ESP:RANG2:BAND:VID 5000000 //Define a sweep time of 1 second for range 2.

  • Page 886: Measuring Spurious Emissions

    ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ESP:RANG2:LIM2:ABS:STAR 10 ESP:RANG2:LIM2:ABS:STOP 10 //Define a relative limit of -20 dBc for the entire range 2 for power class 2. ESP:RANG2:LIM2:REL:STAR -20 ESP:RANG2:LIM2:REL:STOP -20 //------------ Configuring List Evaluation----------------- //Activate list evaluation, i.e. the peak is determined for each range //after each sweep.
  • Page 887 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements INITiate<n>:SPURious This command initiates a Spurious Emission measurement. Suffix: <n> irrelevant Usage: Event 13.5.8.2 Configuring a Sweep List The following commands configure the sweep list for spurious emission measure- ments. The sweep list cannot be configured using remote commands during an on-going sweep operation.
  • Page 888 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <range> 1..30 Selects the measurement range. Parameters: <RBW> Resolution bandwidth. Refer to the data sheet for available resolution bandwidths. Default unit: Hz Manual operation: " RBW " on page 268 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth:VIDeo <VBW> This command defines the video bandwidth for a spurious emission measurement range.
  • Page 889 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:DELete This command removes a range from the sweep list. Note that ● you cannot delete the reference range ● a minimum of three ranges is mandatory. Suffix: <range> 1..30 Selects the measurement range. Usage: Event [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:DETector <Detector>...
  • Page 890 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <FilterType> NORMal Gaussian filters CFILter channel filters RRC filters CISPr | PULSe CISPR (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option Return value for query is always PULS. MIL Std (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option 5 Pole filters *RST: NORM...
  • Page 891 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ● smaller than the span the sweep list covers, the R&S FSW will not measure the ranges that are outside the span - results may be invalid. ● greater than the span the sweep list covers, the R&S FSW will adjust the start fre- quency of the first range and the stop frequency of the last range to the span For more information seeChapter 6.7, "Spurious Emissions...
  • Page 892 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN:STATe <State> This command turns the preamplifier for a spurious emission measurement range on and off. The gain level is defined by [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN[: on page 889. VALue] Suffix: <range> 1..30 Selects the measurement range. Parameters: <State>...
  • Page 893 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STATe This command turns the limit check for all spurious emission measurement ranges on and off (<range> is irrelevant). Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0 *RST: Manual operation: " Limit Check " on page 270 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STOP <Level>...
  • Page 894 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <RefLevel> Reference level. Refer to the data sheet for the reference level range. *RST: 0 dBm Manual operation: " Reference Level " on page 268 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME <SweepTime> This command defines the sweep time for a spurious emission measurement range. Suffix: <range>...
  • Page 895 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Transducer> String containing the transducer file name, including the path information. Manual operation: " Transducer " on page 269 13.5.8.3 Configuring the List Evaluation The following commands configure the list evaluation. Useful commands for spurious emission measurements described elsewhere ●...
  • Page 896 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0 ON | 1 Includes all detected peaks (up to a maximum defined by on page 894). CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:SUBRanges OFF | 0 Includes only one peak per range. *RST: Example: CALC:ESP:PSE:DET ON...
  • Page 897 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:SUBRanges <NumberPeaks> CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:SUBRanges <NumberPeaks> This command defines the number of peaks included in the peak list. After this number of peaks has been found, the R&S FSW stops the peak search and continues the search in the next measurement range.
  • Page 898 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 13.5.8.7 Programming Example: Spurious Emissions Measurement In the following example, the Spurious Emissions measurement is configured by defin- ing ranges and parameters to create the following sweep list. Note that this example is primarily meant to demonstrate the remote control com- mands, it does not necessarily reflect a useful measurement task.
  • Page 899 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //---------------Configuring a Sweep List---------- LIST:RANG:COUNt? //Returns the number of measurement ranges in the sweep list. LIST:RANG4:DEL //Deletes the fourth range. LIST:RANG1:STAR 10000000 //Defines a start frequency of 10 MHz for range 1. LIST:RANG1:STOP 100000000 //Defines a stop frequency of 100 MHz for range 1.

  • Page 900: Analyzing Statistics (Apd, Ccdf)

    ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //---------------Configuring the List Evaluation---------- CALC:PSE:MARG 100 //Sets the threshold to 100 dB. CALC:PSE:PSH ON //Marks all peaks in the diagram with blue squares. CALC:PSE:SUBR 10 //Sets 10 peaks per range to be stored in the list. //--------------Performing the Measurement----- INIT:SPUR;...
  • Page 901 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF[:STATe] <State> This command turns the CCDF on and off. Suffix: <n> irrelevant Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0 *RST: Example: CALC:STAT:CCDF ON Switches on the CCDF measurement. 13.5.9.2 Configuring Statistical Measurements The following commands configure the measurement.
  • Page 902 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Samples> Range: Min: 100, Max: depends on the RBW filter *RST: 100000 Example: CALC:STAT:NSAM 500 Sets the number of measurement points to be acquired to 500. Manual operation: " Number of Samples " on page 281 13.5.9.3 Using Gate Ranges for Statistical Measurements...
  • Page 903 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <t> Trace <range> 1...3 gate range Parameters: <Time> The value range depends on the gate period you have set for the selected trace with [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe: PERiod. The following rules apply: • the start time may not be higher than the length of the gate •...
  • Page 904 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Time> The value range depends on the gate period you have set for the selected trace with [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe: PERiod. The following rules apply: • the stop time may not be higher than the length of the gate •...
  • Page 905 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO ONCE This command initiates an automatic scaling of the diagram (x- and y-axis). To obtain maximum resolution, the level range is set as a function of the measured spacing between peak power and the minimum power for the APD measurement and of the spacing between peak power and mean power for the CCDF measurement.
  • Page 906 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <RefLevel> The unit is variable. If a reference level offset is included, the range is adjusted by that offset. Range: -130 dBm to 30 dBm *RST: 0 dBm Example: CALC:STAT:SCAL:X:RLEV -60dBm Manual operation: "...
  • Page 907 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Magnitude> The number is a statistical value and therefore dimensionless. Range: 1E-5 to 1.0 *RST: Example: CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:UPP 0.01 Manual operation: " Y-Max / Y-Min " on page 285 13.5.9.5 Performing a Statistical Measurement The following commands are required to perform a statistical measurement: on page 796, see Chapter 13.5.1, "Performing Mea-...
  • Page 908 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:STATistics:RESult<t>? <ResultType> This command queries the results of a CCDF or ADP measurement for a specific trace. Suffix: <n> irrelevant <t> Trace Query parameters: <ResultType> MEAN Average (=RMS) power in dBm measured during the measure- ment time.
  • Page 909 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //-----------Configuring the measurement ------------ *RST //Reset the instrument TRIG:SOUR EXT //Defines the use of an external trigger. TRIG:HOLD 25us //Defines a trigger offset of 25 μs. CALC:STAT:APD ON //Activates APD measurement. CALC:STAT:NSAM 1000 //Sets the number of samples to be included in the statistical evaluation to 1000.

  • Page 910: Measuring The Time Domain Power

    ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //---------------Retrieving Results------------- CALC:STAT:RES1? MEAN //Returns the mean average power for the useful part of the GSM signal. //------------- Determining the CCDF values------------------- CALC:STAT:CCDF ON //Activates CCDF measurement. CALC:MARK2:Y:PERC 95PCT //Sets marker 2 to the 95% probability value. INIT;*WAI //Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished.
  • Page 911 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Remote commands exclusive to time domain power measurements ........... 908 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF ..........908 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage ..........909 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd ..........909 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe] ........909 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe] ........910 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe] ......... 910 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe] ........910 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation[:STATe] CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF This command turns all time domain power evaluation modes off. Suffix: <n>...
  • Page 912 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd <State> This command switches on or off the peak-hold function for the active power measure- ment in zero span in the window specified by the suffix <n>. If activated, the peak for each sweep is compared to the previously stored peak;...
  • Page 913 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe] <State> This command turns the evaluation to determine the positive peak time domain power on and off. The R&S FSW performs the measurement on the trace marker 1 is positioned on. Suffix: <n>...
  • Page 914 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements on page 796 INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] Chapter 13.5.1, "Performing Measurements", on page 793 13.5.10.3 Retrieving Measurement Results The following commands query the results for time domain measurements. Measuring the Mean Power ....... 911 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVERage:RESult? ......911 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult? ........
  • Page 915 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Usage: Query only CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult? This command queries the mean time domain power. To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
  • Page 916 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode. See also on page 795.
  • Page 917 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Return values: <RMSPower> RMS power of the signal during the measurement time. Usage: Query only CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:PHOLd:RESult? This command queries the maximum RMS of the time domain power. The query is only possible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
  • Page 918 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode. See also on page 795.
  • Page 919 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 13.5.10.4 Programming Example: Time Domain Power This programming example demonstrates the measurement example described in Chapter 6.9.6, "Measurement Example", on page 293 in a remote environment. //-------------Configuring the Measurement----------------------- *RST //Resets the instrument INIT:CONT OFF //Turns on single sweep mode.

  • Page 920: Measuring The Harmonic Distortion

    ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:RES? //Queries the mean, peak and RMS time domain power. 13.5.11 Measuring the Harmonic Distortion All remote control commands specific to harmonic distortion measurements are descri- bed here. ● Activating the Measurement..................917 ●...
  • Page 921 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Useful commands for harmonic distortion measurements described elsewhere ● on page 955 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer ● on page 968 [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO Remote commands exclusive to harmonic distortion measurements ....... 918 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:BANDwidth:AUTO ........918 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:NHARmonics ..........918 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:BANDwidth:AUTO <State>...
  • Page 922 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Frequency and level of the first harmonic are determined and used for the mea- surement list. ● Time domain (span = 0) The level of the first harmonic is determined. The frequency remains unchanged. Suffix: <n>...
  • Page 923 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode. See also on page 795.

  • Page 924: Measuring The Third Order Intercept Point

    ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 13.5.12 Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point ● Determining the TOI....................921 ● Programming Example: Measuring the TOI............922 13.5.12.1 Determining the TOI All remote control commands specific to TOI measurements are described here. Useful commands for TOI measurements described elsewhere ●...
  • Page 925 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:SEARchsignal ONCE This command initiates a search for signals in the current trace to determine the third intercept point. Suffix: <n>, <m> irrelevant Parameters: ONCE Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI:SEAR ONCE Executes the search for 2 signals and their intermodulation prod- uct at the currently available trace.

  • Page 926: Measuring The Am Modulation Depth

    ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI ON //Activate TOI measurement. //--------------Performing the Measurement----- INIT:CONT OFF //Selects single sweep mode. CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI:SEAR ONCE //Initiates a search for signals in the current trace. //---------------Retrieving Results------------- CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI:RES? //Returns the TOI. 13.5.13 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth All remote control commands specific to AM modulation depth measurements are described here.
  • Page 927 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0 *RST: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:SEARchsignal ONCE This command initiates a search for the signals required for the AM depth measure- ment. Note that the command does not perform a new measurement, but looks for the sig- nals on the current trace.

  • Page 928: Remote Commands For Emi Measurements

    ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //-----------Configuring the measurement ------------ *RST //Reset the instrument FREQ:CENT 100MHz //Set center frequency FREQ:SPAN 10KHz // Set span CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP ON //Activate AM modulation depth measurement. //--------------Performing the Measurement----- INIT:CONT OFF //Selects single sweep mode. INIT:IMM // Perform a single measurement CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP:SEAR ONCE...
  • Page 929 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ● Retrieving EMI Results..................930 ● Evaluating the Results..................933 ● Programming Example: EMI Measurement............933 13.5.14.1 Activating EMI Measurement EMI measurement must be activated explicitely.......... 926 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement[:STATe] CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement[:STATe] <State> This command turns the EMI measurement marker functionality on and off. Suffix: <n>, <m>...
  • Page 930 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Detector> no final measurement is performed AVER average detector CISPR Average detector CRMS RMS Average detector maximum peak detector quasipeak detector *RST: Manual operation: " Final Test Detector " on page 326 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector <Detector>...
  • Page 931 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Useful commands for configuring EMI final tests described elsewhere: ● on page 963 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE ● on page 962 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] ● on page 956 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe:X:SPACing Remote commands exclusive to configuring EMI final tests ......
  • Page 932 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 13.5.14.5 Controlling LISN The commands required to control a LISN are described here................929 INPut<ip>:LISN:FILTer:HPASs[:STATe] ....................929 INPut<ip>:LISN:PHASe ....................930 INPut<ip>:LISN[:TYPE] INPut<ip>:LISN:FILTer:HPASs[:STATe] <State> This command turns the 150 kHz highpass filter for the ENV216 network on and off. Suffix: <ip>...
  • Page 933 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation: " Phase " on page 331 INPut<ip>:LISN[:TYPE] <Type> This command turns automatic control of a LISN on and off. It also selects the type of network. Suffix: <ip> 1 | 2 irrelevant Parameters: <Type>...
  • Page 934 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Remote commands exclusive to retrieving EMI measurement results ......... 931 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:RESult? ........931 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:RESult? ....931 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<li>:CONDition? ...... 932 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<li>:CONDition? .....932 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<li>:DELTa? ......933 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<li>:DELTa? CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:RESult? <Result> This command queries the result of the EMI measurement at the deltamarker position. Suffix: <n>...
  • Page 935 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Return values: <Condition> The deltamarker has passed the limit check. The deltamarker is inside the margins of a limit line. The deltamarker has failed the limit check. Example: CALC:DELT2:FUNC:FME:LIM2:COND? Queries the condition of deltamarker 2 in relation to limit line 2. Usage: Query only CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<li>:CONDition?
  • Page 936 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Return values: <Amplitude> Vertical distance to the limit line in dB. Example: CALC:DELT3:FUNC:FME:LIM2:DELT? Queries the distance of deltamarker 3 to the second limit line. Usage: Query only CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<li>:DELTa? <Amplitude> This command queries the vertical distance from the marker position to the limit line. The unit is dB.
  • Page 937 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //----------- Configuring the measurement ------------ //Select EMI measurement CALC:MARK:FUNC:FME:STAT ON //Configure CISPR filter and RBW BAND:TYPE CISP BAND:RES 1MHz //Define the dwell time CALC:MARK:FUNC:FME:DWEL 1ms //Configure an auto peak search CALC:MARK:FUNC:FME:PEAK:AUTO ON //Configure a logarithmic frequency scaling DISP:TRAC:X:SPAC LOG //Configure marker demodulation for marker 1...

  • Page 938: List Evaluations

    ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALC:LIM:CLE //----------- Performing the Measurement ------------ //Select single sweep mode. INIT:CONT OFF //Initiate a new measurement and wait until the sweep has finished. INIT;*WAI //------------ Retrieving Results ------------------- //Query the results for the EMI measurement //First marker frequency, then final test level CALC:MARK1:X? CALC:MARK1:FUNC:FME:RES?
  • Page 939 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Noise cancellation in list evaluations Noise cancellation is also available in zero span and thus also for list evaluations. See " Noise Cancellation " on page 164 for details. List evaluations allow for a different instrument setup for each frequency you want to measure.
  • Page 940 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]LIST:POWer:RESult? This command queries the results of the list evaluation. This command may be used to obtain measurement results in an asynchronous way, using the service request mechanism for synchronization to the end of the measure- ment.
  • Page 941 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <ElAttenuation> Defines the electronic attenuation for a list entry. Range: 0 to 30 Increment: 1 Default unit: dB <FilterType> Selects the filter type for a list entry. For more information see [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE. <RBW>...
  • Page 942 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <TriggerSource> EXTernal | EXT2 | EXT3 | IMMediate | IFPower | RFPower | VIDeo Selects a trigger source. For more information see Configuring Triggered and Gated Mea- surements. <TriggerSlope> NEGative | POSitive Selects the trigger slop.

  • Page 943: Measuring The Pulse Power

    ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements LIST:POW 935.2MHZ,0,10,OFF,NORM,1MHZ,3MHZ,440us,0, 935.4MHZ,0,10,10,CFIL,30KHZ,100KHZ,440us,0, 935.6MHZ,0,10,20,CFIL,30KHZ,100KHZ,440us,0; *OPC //Defines a list with 3 entries and initiates the measurement with synchronization to the end. //Analyzer produces a service request //On service request: SENS:LIST:POW:RES? //Returns the results of the measurements, two for each frequency (peak and RMS power). -----Initiliazing the measurement and querying results simultaneously----- LIST:POW? 935.2MHZ,0,10,OFF,NORM,1MHZ,3MHZ,440us,0,...
  • Page 944 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements The Pulse Power measurement is incompatible to other measurement functions (e.g. marker functionality or statistics). If you use a command that controls those functions, the R&S FSW aborts the Pulse Power measurement. The R&S FSW also aborts the Pulse Power measurement if you end the remote ses- sion.
  • Page 945 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <n> Window <m> Marker Parameters: <TimeOffset> Defines a time offset to start the measurement at the first pulse of a trace. *RST: Default unit: s <MeasTime> Defines the measurement time. Default unit: s <PulsePeriod>...
  • Page 946 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Return values: <PulsePower> List of pulse powers. The number of values depends on the number of pulses you have been measuring. The unit is dBm. Usage: Query only [SENSe:]MPOWer[:SEQuence] <Frequency>, <RBW>, <MeasTime>, <TriggerSource>, <TriggerLevel>, <TriggerOffset>, <Detector>, <#OfPulses>...
  • Page 947 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <Detector> Selects the detector and therefore the way the measurement is evaluated. MEAN Calculates the RMS pulse power. PEAK Calculates the peak pulse power. <#OfPulses> Defines the number of pulses included in the measurement. Range: 1 to 32001 Return values:...

  • Page 948: Configuring The Result Display

    ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring the Result Display //Result example: -105.225059509,-105.656074524,-105.423065186,-104.374649048,-103.059822083,-101.29511261, -99.96534729,-99.7452468872,-99.6610794067,-100.327224731,-100.96686554,-101.450386047, -102.150642395,-103.240142822,-105.95476532,-110.583129883,-115.7760849,-126.279388428, -124.620399475,-116.97366333 13.6 Configuring the Result Display The commands required to configure the screen display in a remote environment are described here. The tasks for manual operation are described in Chapter 8.1, "Result Display Configu- ration", on page 480.

  • Page 949: Working With Windows In The Display

    ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring the Result Display Suffix: <n> Window Parameters: <Size> LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen. Other windows are still active in the background. SMALl Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size. If more than one measurement window was displayed originally, these are visible again.
  • Page 950 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring the Result Display <Direction> LEFT | RIGHt | ABOVe | BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win- dow. <WindowType> text value Type of result display (evaluation method) you want to add. See the table below for available parameter values.
  • Page 951 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring the Result Display Example: LAY:CAT? Result: '2',2,'1',1 Two windows are displayed, named '2' (at the top or left), and '1' (at the bottom or right). Usage: Query only LAYout:IDENtify[:WINDow]? <WindowName> This command queries the index of a particular display window in the active channel. Note: to query the name of a particular window, use the LAYout:WINDow<n>: query.
  • Page 952 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring the Result Display Usage: Setting only LAYout:REMove[:WINDow] <WindowName> This command removes a window from the display in the active channel. Setting parameters: <WindowName> String containing the name of the window. In the default state, the name of the window is its index. Example: LAY:REM '2' Removes the result display in the window named '2'.
  • Page 953 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring the Result Display Figure 13-1: SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters: <Index1> The index of one window the splitter controls. <Index2> The index of a window on the other side of the splitter. <Position>...
  • Page 954 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring the Result Display LAYout:WINDow<n>:ADD? <Direction>,<WindowType> This command adds a measurement window to the display. Note that with this com- mand, the suffix <n> determines the existing window next to which the new window is added, as opposed to LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]?, for which the existing window is defined by a parameter.

  • Page 955: Examples: Configuring The Result Display

    ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring the Result Display LAYout:WINDow<n>:REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix <n> from the display in the active channel. The result of this command is identical to the command. LAYout:REMove[:WINDow] Suffix: <n> Window Example: LAY:WIND2:REM Removes the result display in window 2.
  • Page 956 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring the Result Display //--------------Resetting the instrument ----------- *RST //--------------- Adding new windows -------------------- //Add a Spectrogram window beneath the Frequency Sweep window LAY:ADD? '1',BEL,SGR //Result: window number: '2' //Add a Marker Table window to the right of the Frequency Sweep window LAY:ADD? '1',RIGH,MTAB //Result: window number: '3' //Add a Marker Peak List window to the right of the Spectrogram window...
  • Page 957 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring the Result Display 13.6.3.2 Example 2: Replacing and Removing Windows Starting from the display configured in Example 1: Adding and Arranging Windows, we will remove and replace result displays to obtain the following configuration: 1 Frequency Sweep 4 Marker Table //-------------- Preparing the configuration from example 1 ----------- *RST...

  • Page 958: Setting Basic Measurement Parameters

    ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters 13.7 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters All commands that set measurement-independent parameters are described here. ● Defining the Frequency and Span.................955 ● Configuring Bandwidth and Sweep Settings............961 ● Configuring the Vertical Axis (Amplitude, Scaling)..........
  • Page 959 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Usage: Event Manual operation: " Center Frequency = Marker Frequency " on page 508 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CSTep This command matches the center frequency step size to the current marker fre- quency. The command turns delta markers into normal markers. Suffix: <n>...
  • Page 960 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example: FREQ:CENT 100 MHz FREQ:CENT:STEP 10 MHz FREQ:CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz. Manual operation: " Center Frequency " on page 424 " Frequency " on page 460 [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP <StepSize> This command defines the center frequency step size.
  • Page 961 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <CouplingType> SPAN Couples the step size to the span. Available for measurements in the frequency domain. Couples the step size to the resolution bandwidth. Available for measurements in the time domain. Decouples the step size.
  • Page 962 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN <Span> This command defines the frequency span. If you set a span of 0 Hz in the Spectrum application, the R&S FSW starts a measure- ment in the time domain. Parameters: <Span>...
  • Page 963 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters 13.7.1.2 Configuring Signal Tracking When signal tracking is activated, the maximum signal is determined after each fre- quency sweep and the center frequency is set to the frequency of this signal. Thus with drifting signals the center frequency follows the signal.

  • Page 964: Configuring Bandwidth And Sweep Settings

    ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold <Level> This command defines the threshold level for the signal tracking process. Note that you have to turn on signal tracking before you can use the command. Suffix: <n>, <m> irrelevant Parameters: <Level>...
  • Page 965 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters ..................964 [SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO ...................964 [SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTO ..................964 [SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio ................... 964 [SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:RATio ..................964 [SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo:TYPE ................... 964 [SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:TYPE [SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution] <Bandwidth> [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] <Bandwidth> This command defines the resolution bandwidth and decouples the resolution band- width from the span. In the Real-Time application, the resolution bandwidth is always coupled to the span.
  • Page 966 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <Ratio> Range: 0.0001 to 1 *RST: 0.01 Example: BAND:RAT 0.1 Manual operation: " Span/RBW " on page 448 [SENSe:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE <FilterType> [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE <FilterType> This command selects the resolution filter type. When you change the filter type, the command selects the next larger filter bandwidth if the same bandwidth is unavailable for that filter.
  • Page 967 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <Bandwidth> refer to data sheet *RST: AUTO is set to ON Example: BAND:VID 10 kHz Manual operation: " VBW " on page 447 [SENSe:]BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO <State> [SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTO <State> This command couples and decouples the video bandwidth to the resolution band- width.
  • Page 968 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <Mode> LINear The video filter is applied in front of the logarithmic amplifier. In linear mode, measurements with a logarithmic level scale result in flatter falling edges compared to logarithmic mode. The reason is the conversion of linear power values into logarithmic level values: if you halve the linear power, the logarithmic level decreases by 3 dB.
  • Page 969 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <SweepCount> When you set a sweep count of 0 or 1, the R&S FSW performs one single sweep in single sweep mode. In continuous sweep mode, if the sweep count is set to 0, a moving average over 10 sweeps is performed.
  • Page 970 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Table 13-4: Optimization parameters in FFT mode Optimization mode Description DYNamic Optimizes the dynamic range by using the narrowest possible partial span (depend- ing on the RBW). The autorange function for the internal IF gain calculation is activated to obtain the best control range for the A/D converter.
  • Page 971 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters For EMI measurements, 200001 sweep points are available. Parameters: <SweepPoints> Range: 101 to 100001 *RST: 1001 SWE:POIN 251 Example: Manual operation: "Sweep Points" on page 450 [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME <Time> This command defines the sweep time. It automatically decouples the time from any other settings.
  • Page 972 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <Type> AUTO Automatic selection of the sweep type between sweep mode and FFT. FFT mode Sweep list *RST: AUTO Example: SWE:TYPE FFT Manual operation: " Sweep Type " on page 451 [SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE:USED This command queries the sweep type if you have turned on automatic selection of the sweep type.

  • Page 973: Configuring The Vertical Axis (Amplitude, Scaling)

    ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example: BAND:FFT NARR Select narrow partial span for FFT filter. 13.7.3 Configuring the Vertical Axis (Amplitude, Scaling) The following commands are required to configure the amplitude and vertical axis set- tings in a remote environment. ●...
  • Page 974 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer <Unit> UNIT<n>:POWer <Unit> This command selects the unit of the y-axis. The unit applies to all power-based measurement windows with absolute values. Suffix: <n> irrelevant Parameters: <Unit> DBM | V | A | W | DBPW | WATT | DBUV | DBMV | VOLT | DBUA | AMPere | DBUa_mhz | DBUV_mhz | DBmV_mhz | DBpW_mhz (Units based on 1 MHz require installed R&S FSW-K54 (EMI...
  • Page 975 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters [SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection <State> This command turns noise cancellation on and off. If noise cancellation is on, the R&S FSW performs a reference measurement to deter- mine its inherent noise and subtracts the result from the channel power measurement result (first active trace only).
  • Page 976 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:AUTO <State> This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level. Thus, when the reference level is changed, the R&S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly. Suffix: <ip>...
  • Page 977 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <Attenuation> attenuation in dB Range: see data sheet Increment: 1 dB *RST: 0 dB (OFF) Default unit: DB Example: INP:EATT:AUTO OFF INP:EATT 10 dB Manual operation: " Using Electronic Attenuation " on page 434 INPut<ip>:EATT:AUTO <State>...
  • Page 978 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Manual operation: " Using Electronic Attenuation " on page 434 13.7.3.3 Configuring a Preamplifier ....................975 INPut<ip>:EGAin[:STATe] ....................975 INPut<ip>:GAIN:STATe ....................976 INPut<ip>:GAIN[:VALue] INPut<ip>:EGAin[:STATe] <State> Before this command can be used, the external preamplifier must be connected to the R&S FSW.
  • Page 979 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1 OFF | 0 Switches the function off ON | 1 Switches the function on *RST: Example: INP:GAIN:STAT ON Switches on 20 dB preamplification. Manual operation: "...
  • Page 980 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Note that the command works only for a logarithmic scaling. You can select the scaling with DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing. Suffix: <n> Window <t> irrelevant Parameters: <Range> Range: 1 dB to 200 dB *RST: 100 dB Example: DISP:TRAC:Y 110dB Manual operation:...
  • Page 981 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters In spectrum displays, for example, this command is not available. Suffix: <n> Window <t> irrelevant Parameters: <Value> numeric value WITHOUT UNIT (unit according to the result dis- play) Defines the range per division (total range = 10*<Value>) *RST: depends on the result display Example:...

  • Page 982: Configuring Triggered And Gated Measurements

    ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <ScalingType> LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling. LINear Linear scaling in %. Linear scaling in the specified unit. PERCent Linear scaling in %. *RST: LOGarithmic Example: DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LIN Selects linear scaling in %. Manual operation: "...
  • Page 983 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DTIMe <DropoutTime> Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again. Parameters: <DropoutTime> Dropout time of the trigger. Range: 0 s to 10.0 s *RST: Manual operation: "...
  • Page 984 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HYSTeresis <Hysteresis> This command defines the trigger hysteresis, which is only available for "IF Power" trig- ger sources. Parameters: <Hysteresis> Range: 3 dB to 50 dB *RST: 3 dB Example: TRIG:SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source.
  • Page 985 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Manual operation: " Trigger Level " on page 463 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IQPower <TriggerLevel> This command defines the magnitude the I/Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event. Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed.
  • Page 986 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <Type> POSitive | NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level (rising edge). NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level (falling edge). *RST: POSitive Example: TRIG:SLOP NEG Manual operation: "...
  • Page 987 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <Source> IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the "Trigger Input" connector. If the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension (B2000/B5000) is installed and active, this parameter activates the "Ch3" input connector on the oscilloscope. Then the R&S FSW triggers when the signal fed into the "Ch3"...
  • Page 988 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TIME:RINTerval <Interval> This command defines the repetition interval for the time trigger. Parameters: <Interval> 2.0 ms to 5000 Range: 2 ms to 5000 s *RST: 1.0 s Example: TRIG:SOUR TIME Selects the time trigger input for triggering. TRIG:TIME:RINT 50 The sweep starts every 50 s.
  • Page 989 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example: SWE:EGAT ON Switches on the external gate mode. SWE:EGAT:TYPE EDGE Switches on the edge-triggered mode. SWE:EGAT:HOLD 100US Sets the gate delay to 100 µs. SWE:EGAT:LEN 500US Sets the gate opening time to 500 µs. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end.
  • Page 990 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous:PLENgth <Time> Defines the length in seconds of a single gate period in continuous gating. The length is determined from the beginning of one gate measurement to the beginning of the next one. Parameters: <Time>...
  • Page 991 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth <GateLength> This command defines the gate length. Parameters: <GateLength> Range: 125 ns to 30 s *RST: 400μs Example: SWE:EGAT:LENG 10ms Manual operation: " Gate Length " on page 472 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel:RFPower <GateLevel> Defines the gate level for which the gate is open.
  • Page 992 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <GateLevel> numeric value Range: 0.5 V to 3.5 V *RST: 1.4 V Default unit: V Example: SENS:SWE:EGAT:AUTO MAN SENS:SWE:EGAT:SOUR EXT2 SENS:SWE:EGAT:LEV:EXT2 1V Sets the gating trigger to a level of 1 V at trigger port 2. Manual operation: "Level"...
  • Page 993 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Manual operation: " Trigger Source " on page 461 "External Trigger 1/2/3" on page 461 " Video " on page 462 " IF Power " on page 462 " RF Power " on page 462 "...
  • Page 994 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Suffix: <port> Selects the used trigger port. 2 = trigger port 2 (front) 3 = trigger port 3 (rear panel) Parameters: <Direction> INPut Port works as an input. OUTPut Port works as an output. *RST: INPut Manual operation:...
  • Page 995 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <OutputType> DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R&S FSW has triggered inter- nally. TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event. UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal.

  • Page 996: Adjusting Settings Automatically

    ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES EUTRa FREQ:CENT 1GHZ SWE:EGAT ON SWE:EGAT:SOUR EXT SWE:EGAT:TYPE EDGE SWE:EGAT:HOLD 9.25MS SWE:EGAT:LENG 1.25MS SWE:EGAT:CONTinuous:STAT? SWE:EGAT:CONTinuous:STAT ON SWE:EGAT:CONTinuous:STAT? SWE:EGAT:CONTinuous:PLENgth? //0.005 SWE:EGAT:CONTinuous:PLENgth 4MS SWE:EGAT:CONTinuous:PLENgth? //0.004 SWE:EGAT:CONTinuous:PCOunt? //100 SWE:EGAT:CONTinuous:PCOunt 80 SWE:EGAT:CONTinuous:PCOunt? //80 //--------------Performing the Measurement----- INIT:CONT OFF INIT // Sweep duration is less than 1 second...
  • Page 997 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters ................996 [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:TRIGger ..................996 [SENSe:]ADJust:FREQuency ....................996 [SENSe:]ADJust:LEVel [SENSe:]ADJust:ALL This command initiates a measurement to determine and set the ideal settings for the current task automatically (only once for the current measurement). This includes: ●...
  • Page 998 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Parameters: <Mode> AUTO The R&S FSW determines the measurement length automati- cally according to the current input data. MANual The R&S FSW uses the measurement length defined by [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure[:LEVel]:DURation on page 994. *RST: AUTO Manual operation:...

  • Page 999: Configuring The Data Input And Output

    ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters Example: For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm, the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm. Manual operation: " Upper Level Hysteresis " on page 478 [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:TRIGger <State>...
  • Page 1000 ® Remote Commands R&S Setting Basic Measurement Parameters ● Input........................ 997 ● Using External Mixers..................1002 ● Setting up Probes....................1017 ● External Generator Control................. 1022 ● Working with Power Sensors................1033 ● Configuring the Outputs..................1043 13.7.6.1 RF Input ..................997 CALibration:PADJust[:STATe] ...............997 INPut<ip>:ATTenuation:PROTection:RESet...

This manual is also suitable for:

Fsw43Fsw50Fsw67Fsw85Fsw8Fsw13 ... Show all

Table of Contents

Save PDF